JP2020069211A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To suppress a decrease in interest in a game when it is made practicable to control to a special state.SOLUTION: A game machine can control to a first special state (for example, a first KT state), and a second special state (for example, a second KT state) more advantageous than the first special state as special states, and can control to the second special state based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, a third probability variable jackpot occurs, and variation display is completed for fifty times or a hundred times in a high-probability/high-base state (the first KT state)). The game machine also includes special performance execution means capable of executing a special performance for causing predetermined display to be difficult to be visually recognized once when a game state is switched, and the special performance execution means executes a pseudo closing performance for displaying a specific image and allowing predetermined display to be difficult to be visually recognized as a special performance, and then executes an opening performance for separating the specific image and allowing predetermined display to be recognized visually.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-23

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player. There is one configured in. Further, a variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information (also referred to as "fluctuation") is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific display result, a predetermined game value is given. There is one configured to give the player (so-called pachinko machine).

  The prize value is to pay out the prize balls or give points or prizes according to the winning of the game balls in the prize area. In addition, the game value is that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for the player who easily hits the ball when the specific display result is obtained, and for the player. That is, the right to generate an advantageous state is generated, and the condition for paying out prize balls is easily established.

  In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) which is started in the variable display means based on the fact that the game ball has won the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. When it is done, "big hit (advantageous state)" occurs. The derivation display is to stop and display the symbol. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and a big hit game state where a hit ball is easy to win is entered. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning holes are won, the winning holes are closed. The number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 16 rounds). It should be noted that the opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach the predetermined number, the special winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  In such a gaming machine, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel, and the special state is controlled more frequently than the non-special state in the special state. Some are controllably configured. For example, Patent Document 2 describes that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can change in parallel, and shifts to a firework rush (high-probability non-time shortened state). It is also described that even if the same big hit symbol is won, there may be cases where the fireworks rush shifts to the fireworks rush and cases where the fireworks rush does not shift depending on the state when the winning. For example, if the first special symbol lottery is executed in the normal mode to win the 9-round symbol 2 or 16-round symbol, the 9-round jackpot game or the 16-round jackpot game is executed, and while shifting to the fireworks rush, normally When the second special symbol lottery is executed in the mode to win the 9 round symbol 2 or the 16 round symbol, the 9 round jackpot game or the 16 round jackpot game is executed, and it is described that the special normal mode is entered. ..

JP, 2017-176585, A (paragraph 0057, 0334, 0572, 0574).

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there are cases where it is controlled to a special state and cases where it is not controlled when it is controlled to an advantageous state, and when it is not controlled to a special state, there is interest in the game. It may decrease.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game when it is configured to be controllable in a special state.

(Means 1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and gaming state control means capable of controlling a plurality of gaming states (for example, steps 080IWS2205 to S2207 in the gaming control microcomputer 100). , S2210 to S2219, S2222 to S2225, and S2227) and when the game state is switched (for example, when an irregular big hit occurs, a variable display of the 50th variation in the low probability / high base state is performed). At the time), a special effect execution unit (for example, step 080IWS503 in the CPU 120 for effect control) that can execute a special effect (for example, shutter effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize a predetermined display (for example, the left, right, or right decorative pattern). , S505, S506, S508, S512) As a special effect, the special effect performing means includes a still image in a state in which the specific image (for example, the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 shown in FIGS. 9-43 (B) and 9-44 (A) are closed). ) Is displayed to execute a pseudo-closed effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the predetermined display, and then the specific image is separated so that the predetermined display becomes visible (for example, FIG. 9-43 (C) to (F)). And the upper and lower shutters 080IW033 and 034 shown in FIGS. 9-44 (B) and (C) gradually open) may be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to smoothly hide the predetermined display and switch the display with a simple display in the special effect.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the variable display execution of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel. Means (for example, the part that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100), and advantageous state control means that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) (for example, for game control) A portion for executing steps S122 to S125 in the microcomputer 100) and a special state control means capable of controlling in a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hitting game state) (for example, step S126 in the game controlling microcomputer 100). (The part that executes ~ S128), and the frequency of being controlled to the special state is higher than the non-special state. Special state control means capable of controlling in another state (for example, KT state) (for example, a portion for executing steps 080IWS2205 to S2207, S2210 to S2219, S2222 to S2225, S2227 in the game control microcomputer 100), and special The state control means is capable of controlling, as the special state, a first special state (for example, a first KT state) and a second special state (for example, a second KT state) that is more advantageous than the first special state, The second special state based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established (for example, the third probability variation big hit, the high probability / high base state (first KT state), 50 or 100 times of variable display ends) Can be controlled (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, steps 080IWS67A ~ S 1A, S67B to S71B, S2226, S2227), when controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display of the second identification information while being controlled to the non-special state, it is controlled to the second special state. The predetermined condition is less likely to be satisfied than when the second identification information is controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, the high probability / low base state (second KT state). ) During the first probability variation big hit and the second probability variation big hit occurs, it is immediately controlled to high probability / low base state (second KT state), while low probability / low base state (normal state) When the 1st probability variation big hit or the 2nd probability variation big hit occurs, it is controlled to high probability / high base state (1st KT state), and then high probability / low base when 50 or 100 times of variable display is finished. Status (Controlled to the second KT state)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the control is configured in the special state.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, in the case of being controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display of the first identification information when being controlled to the second special state, when being controlled to the non-special state The predetermined condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the case where the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display of the first identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, the predetermined condition is set during the low probability / low base state (normal state). When the 1st probability variation big hit or the 2nd probability variation big hit occurs, it is controlled to the high probability / high base state (first KT state), and then when the variable display of 50 times or 100 times is finished, the high probability / low base state ( 2nd KT state), the first probability variation big hit and the second probability variation big hit occur during the high probability / low base state (second KT state). 2KT state) , Moreover, as shown in Figure 9-3 may be configured to first select the split proportions of probability variation big hit and the second probability variation big hit is high) as in the case of variable display of the first special symbol is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. If the game machine is a simple game machine and the advantage value is set to a low setting value, the predetermined condition is more easily established than if the advantage value is set to a high setting value (specifically, FIG. 9-1). And as shown in FIG. 9-2, since the jackpot probability is the lowest at the setting value “1”, it is executed up to 50 or 100 times of variable display, which is a jackpot in the high probability / high base state (first KT state). It may be configured to be easy to move to a high probability / low base state (second KT state). According to such a configuration, even if the setting value is set to a low degree of advantage, it is possible to make expectations and improve interest in the game.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, when the game state is switched (for example, when an irregular big hit occurs, when the variable display of the 50th variation in the low probability / high base state is executed) ), A specific image (for example, a still image in which the upper and lower shutters 080IW033 and 034 shown in FIGS. 9-43 (B) and 9-44 (A) are closed) is displayed, and a predetermined display (for example, left image) is displayed. Special effect executing means (for example, step 080IWS503, S505, S506, S508, S512 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special effect (for example, shutter effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the middle right decorative pattern. The special effect executing means includes a plurality of types of specific images (for example, still images shown in FIGS. 9-46 (A) to (C)). Can be displayed, and different types of specific images are displayed in accordance with the game state when controlled to an advantageous state (for example, shutter effect is executed in the variable display of the 50th variation in the low probability / high base state). 9-46 (A), the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 including the characters “END” are displayed, and when the gaming state is the low probability / low base state (normal state), When the irregular big hit occurs in the low probability / high base state, the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 including the characters “waiting for intense heat” are displayed as shown in FIG. 9-46 (B). When the gaming state is a high probability / low base state (second KT state), if an irregular jackpot occurs, upper and lower chassis including numbers as shown in FIG. 9-46 (C). 080IW033, 034 is displayed). With such a configuration, it is possible to smoothly hide the predetermined display and switch the display with a simple display in the special effect.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of a first special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of character part control process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is an explanatory view for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for every set value. It is an explanatory view for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for every set value. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning a prize ball device and a special variable winning a prize ball device in a KT state. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol stop process. It is a flow chart which shows accessory control normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows gate passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart showing a big hit ending process. It is a flowchart showing a big hit ending process. It is a flowchart showing a small hit ending process. It is the explanation drawing which shows the list of the game state which is controlled after the big hit game every big hit type. It is an explanatory view for explaining how to transition the gaming state. It is the flowchart which shows the concrete example of production control main processing in the feature section 080IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the stop design of a small design. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows variable display start waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows shutter production start processing 1 and shutter production start processing 2. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart showing a special figure hit waiting process. It is a flowchart showing a special figure hit waiting process. It is the flowchart which shows production processing during the big hit. It is a flow chart which shows ending production processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the right-handed notification. It is an explanatory view for explaining the production mode of shutter production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the switching mode of the display of a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the shutter production performed in the 50th variation of an irregular big hit or a low probability / high base state. It is an explanatory view for explaining image data used in a shutter effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display method of the still image used by shutter production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the kind of image displayed by shutter effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variable display when it is a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of one special symbol. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change processing in the modification 1. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change processing in the modification 1. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variable display at the time of being a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of one special symbol in the modification 1. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change processing in modification 2. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change processing in modification 2. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variable display when it is a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of one special symbol in the modification 2. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change processing in modification 3. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variable display at the time of a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of one special symbol in the modification 3. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change processing in modification 4. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change processing in modification 4. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a switching mode of display of a decorative pattern in modification example 5. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing in the modification 6. 21 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing in modification 6;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged / reduced. In addition, the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable.

  The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right-handed indicator 26 is provided for urging a right-handed operation of performing a firing operation aiming at the right side of the game area. There is. The right-handed indicator 26 is composed of, for example, an LED, and is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers etc.) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

  Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, there is provided a display area for displaying a suspension display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure, and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. Area 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handing notification LED 37 for urging a right-handing operation is provided. The right-handing notification LED 37 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

  In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B that are configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A is the number of LEDs that are turned on. The first pending storage number is displayed by, and the second pending display unit 25B displays the second pending storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning port is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, a predetermined number (1) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information.

  A row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening so that the game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area do not enter the area where the first starting winning opening is provided. Has been done. Thus, the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering is provided, so that the game ball is operated to aim at the left side of the game area (so-called left hitting). The game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the operation is performed.

  In this example, the row of nails 19 is provided, so that the game ball can be won in the first start winning port only when the player makes a left-handed operation. I can't stop. For example, the game ball may be configured to be able to win in the first starting prize hole only when the player is left-handed because the first starting prize hole is provided on the left side of the game area. The mouth may be provided on the left side of the game area, and the row of nails 19 may also be provided so that the game ball can be won in the first start winning opening only when the left striking operation is performed.

  A pass gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

  Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 forming a special winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-back direction to move the bottom surface. The game ball is changed to an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which a game ball can be won in a special winning opening located below the member and a closed state (also referred to as a closed state) in which the game ball cannot be won. The special variable winning ball device 7 is a jackpot gaming state that occurs when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the bottom member is moved forward. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the forward movement is performed toward the rear, and the opening control is performed to open the special winning opening, which is the winning area.

  Below the special variable winning ball device 7, there are provided a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning port for a small hit, and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning port, as shown in FIG. As shown in, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side on the right side. The special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and a plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-back direction. By moving the ball back and forth, a special winning opening and a second starting winning opening located below the bottom member allow the game ball to win the prize (also called the open condition) and the game ball cannot win the prize. Say). The special variable winning ball device 17 is a small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit pattern) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which it is moved forward toward the front, and the opening control is performed to open the special winning opening which is the winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B, when the normal symbol display device 20 hits and displays the symbol, the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state where the bottom member is moved forward toward the front, The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening, which is the winning area, is executed.

  In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, so that the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, the special variable winning ball device 7 moves on the special variable winning ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B below it.

  Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed such that the bottom surface members are slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, so the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are variable. If the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is closed, the game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 does not win the special winning ball device 6B. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning port is in the open state, the gaming ball dropped to the second starting winning port is a special variable winning ball. The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second start winning hole is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided to the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning opening is open, the gaming ball wins the special winning opening. Furthermore, if the special winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and drops to the out opening as it is.

  Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of restriction pieces for reducing the flow-down speed of the game balls flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In the present example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with restriction pieces, so that the game flows down from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow is delayed compared with the case without the restriction piece.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is changed to the special variable winning ball device. Since the game balls are configured to flow toward 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. Can be said.

  Inside the special winning opening, there is provided a switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball winning in the special winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning a prize ball device 7 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, it becomes a state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning a prize ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening is closed, it is impossible to pass the game ball to the special winning opening (enter) to obtain the prize ball. You will be at a disadvantage.

  Inside the special winning opening, a switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting the game ball winning in the special winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening that is opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of the winning balls is smaller than that when the gaming ball wins the big winning opening, For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter) other prize holes such as the first start prize hole 1 and the second start prize hole. Therefore, if the special variable winning a prize ball device 17 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, it becomes a state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot get the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning opening. You will be at a disadvantage.

  Further, in the second starting winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting the game ball winning in the second starting winning opening is provided. When the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection information.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  In this pachinko gaming machine 1, the passage gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning hole), the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning port). Is provided on the right side of the game area, so when the player is in a big hit game or in the KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the game area (a so-called right hitting operation). )I do.

  At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, winning at the starting openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

  Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure pending memories, which is the number of universal figure pending games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

  In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, since the variation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the passage gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, since the big hit game state is entered based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the pass gate 41, the pass gate 41 also plays a role as an operation area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves as both a normal starting region and an operating region.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper and left upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect frame LED 9 is provided in the periphery of the game area. ..

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball striking device. ) Is provided with a hit ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the action (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to aim the left side of the gaming area and perform a firing operation (so-called left-handed operation). When the player makes a left-hand hitting operation by rotating the hitting ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the player, and the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol display The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

  In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period during execution of the special drawing game, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state described later (starting winning occurs, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) As a fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "big hit". .. Also, if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, "missing" is indicated. Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, and the small hit symbol may be "small hit".

  After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, provided that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

  In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier of the two. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. In this way, one cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

  In the big hit game state, the player can get the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  In addition, the "big hit" is set to the big hit type. For example, multiple types of opening mode (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the special winning opening and a plurality of types of game states after the big hit game state (normal state, probability variation state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) are prepared. The jackpot type is set according to these. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain a large number of prize balls, or a big hit type that has few prize balls or almost no prize balls may be provided.

  After the big hit game state is finished, it may be controlled to a certain variation state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the big hit type.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), the probability variation control is performed so that the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than that in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a "big hit" is likely to occur.

  In the KT state, the KT control that is more likely to make a small hit than in the normal state is executed. With this pachinko gaming machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hitting game state, compared to the large hitting game state, a small number of prize balls can be obtained, but this is an advantageous state for the player.

  In the high base state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special map change time (period during which the special map changes) compared to the normal state is executed (time saving state), and it is called "Public hit" in the normal figure game. By increasing the probability of becoming higher than in the normal state, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening (high opening control, high base control) is also executed. The high base state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

  The probability change state, the KT state, and the high base state are continued until one of the ending conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started is satisfied. To do. The condition that the end condition is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cut (variation of the number of times probability).

  The normal state is an advantageous state such as a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player, a game state other than a special state such as a probability change state, a KT state, and a high base state, and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability of becoming the same as the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset, when the predetermined return processing is not executed after power-on) is controlled. It is in a state of being.

  When the big hit game is finished and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to carry out a firing operation (right hitting operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player makes a right-hand hitting operation by rotating the hitting ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the player and the gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal figure game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, the opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  In the second special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) As a fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "big hit", If a predetermined special symbol different from the big hit symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it is a "small hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing symbol".

  After the display result in the second special figure game is "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, provided that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

  After the small hit game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed).

  The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or in place of the display, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the point of the frame LED 9 is used. It may be performed by turning on / off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

  As effects to be executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game is displayed. In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination described later, the decorative design which is not yet stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect that continues.

  In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the proportion of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) that is a “big hit” (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

  In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state. In the case of "uncertain variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation design, and the even decoration pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation design (normal design). After the reach mode is achieved with the non-probability variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It should be noted that the display result of the special drawing game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state of a mode similar to small hit game state) and when it is "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design does not become the reach mode, but as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach-miss".) May be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach-miss"). Further, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss") (Also referred to as) fixed decoration pattern may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern becomes “reach lost”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design, and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

  Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit performance, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect showing that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the form similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following game state the high-precision state) big hitting game By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-precision state. May be.

  Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling a gaming state, a small hitting gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the universal figure hold display device 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

  The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch (first counting switch 23 and second counting switch 24). )) Is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 by taking in a detection signal (a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on due to a game ball passing or entering). The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, the solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 for the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory and the special winning opening door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later). )), The status of the game (for example, the start and end of variable display, the status of opening of the special winning opening, the occurrence of winnings, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121, thereby performing a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12, and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the effect execution based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and is a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal according to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further outputs a sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turns on / off the frame LED 9 and the right-handing notification LED 37. Therefore, the sound control signal (a signal that specifies a sound to be output) is voice-controlled. The LED signal is supplied to the board 13 or an LED signal (a signal designating the lighting / lighting-out mode of the LED) is supplied to the LED control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

  The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handing notification LED 37, drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handing notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and specifies the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right hitting notification LED 37 are turned on / off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and turning on / off of the LED.

  It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of turning on / off the LED (supply of sound designation signal or LED signal, etc.), control of the movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 updatable counts the numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for receiving the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal). And an output port of.

  Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the LED control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

  When the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using the error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). In accordance with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. For these commands, the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the recovery from the power interruption has been performed or is being restored from the power interruption. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can regularly execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to execute the predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port are performed via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 and start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). The CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing the execution and suspension management of the first special symbol game (details will be described later). Further, the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). The CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, so that execution and suspension management of the second special symbol game are realized. In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously perform the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

  Subsequent to the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes an accessory control process process (step S25C). The CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. (details will be described later).

  Following the accessory control process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the management of execution and suspension of the general figure game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure hit". The execution of the general figure game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the general figure reservation display unit 25C is turned on to display the number of general figure reservations.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when an electric power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

  Although not shown in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal for outputting a test signal for making it possible to confirm the control state of the game machine outside the game machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 performs control to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can specify that the right-handed operation is being performed. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during the big hit game, the small hit game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not perform the control of outputting the right-hand hitting test signal during the small hitting game based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process processing. In the first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a first start winning determination process (step S101A).

  In the first start winning a prize determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning to the first starting prize hole, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When the start winning award to the first start winning a prize mouth occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as the hold information in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. To be done. In addition, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, a transmission for transmitting an effect control command for designating a determination result such as occurrence of a start winning, a first hold storage number, and a look-ahead determination on the effect control board 12. Settings are made. The effect control command at the time of the start winning set to be transmitted in this way is effect control from the main board 11 by, for example, executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the first special symbol process processing is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

  After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110A to S113A in accordance with the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the first special symbol process process (steps S110A to S113A), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

  The first special symbol normal process of step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In the first special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game, based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Further, in the first special symbol normal process, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" In this case, the jackpot type is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the first special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal process ends.

  When making various determinations based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The first variation pattern setting process of step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "1". In this first variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is determined using a random number value for determining the variation pattern, based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. It includes a process of determining which one. In the first fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether reach or not), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

  The first special symbol variation process of step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "2". In this first special symbol variation processing, the setting process for changing the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol is measured. It includes processing to do. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol variation process ends. To do.

  In this example, since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the first special symbol variation process (step S112A), the first When the variable display of the special symbol is being displayed, it may be a small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol and be controlled to a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is before the small hit opening). Process-determine whether or not the value is equivalent to the small hit end process), if the small hit game is not changing the value of the first special figure process flag from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process Thus, if the small hit game is not in progress, the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process. By performing such control, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. Control to do so. Incidentally, not only such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is interrupted (of the timer The update may be interrupted).

  Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the gaming state. For example, in a normal state, if configured to suspend the variable display of the first special symbol, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period due to the stop of swinging of the decorative pattern, etc., which results in a feeling of strangeness to the player. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable that the small hit ending period be shorter than that in the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hitting ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, while the small hitting ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

  Further, in the case of configuring as described above, for example, in the first KT state, since the game ball is practically difficult to win in the small hit control and no special effect is produced, the small hit ending period is shorter than that in the second KT state. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control and an effect for emphasizing the small hit control is executed. Therefore, the small hit ending period may be made longer than in the first KT state. .. In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, while the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

  Further, as for the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pre-processing period, the length of the period may be changed depending on the gaming state similarly to the above small hit ending period.

  The first special symbol stop process of step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "3". In this first special symbol stop processing, to stop the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, to stop display (derive) the fixed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol It includes the process of setting. When the display result is "big hit", setting processing for starting the big hit game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", a process for starting the small hit game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", the game state is also updated when the probability variation state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled, and when the end of the number of cuts is satisfied. .. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

  The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described in FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be described. In addition, each random number value extracted in the first starting winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information.

  In this example, since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the process shifts to the second special symbol variation process to change the second special symbol. When it is being displayed, it may be a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol and may be controlled to a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is before the small hit opening). Process ~ determine whether or not the value is equivalent to the small hit end process), if the small hit game is not changing the value of the second special symbol process flag from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation process Thus, if the small hit game is not in progress, the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process. By performing such control, the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol is resumed after the end of the small hit game. Control to do so. Note that, not only in such control, for example, during the small hitting game based on the variation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the second special symbol is interrupted (of the timer The update may be interrupted).

  Incidentally, with regard to the small hit control based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period or the small hit ending period may be changed depending on the game state.

  FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process process. In this accessory control process process, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S120 to S128 in accordance with the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S120 to S128) of the accessory control process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

  The accessory control normal processing in step S120 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "0". In this accessory control normal process, whether or not the setting for starting the big hit game is monitored, and if the setting for starting the big hit game is made, the process for starting the big hit game is performed. The value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "1".

  The gate passage waiting process of step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "1". In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the passage gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

  The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is "2". This jackpot opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state and setting the jackpot opening state based on that the display result is "jackpot" Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period for opening the special winning opening and an upper limit number of times of execution of the round are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", and the jackpot opening preprocessing is completed.

  The big hit opening process in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "3". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the special winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like are determined. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4". , The big hit opening process is ended.

  The jackpot opening post-processing of step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "4". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the big winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the big hit game state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “3”, while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution count, the accessory control process The value of the flag is updated to "5". When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the jackpot opening post-process ends.

  The big hit ending process of step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "5". In this big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, or a certain change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state The control, the KT control, the process of performing various settings for starting the high base control, and the like are included. When such a setting is made, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "6". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the special winning opening to the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "7", and the small hit opening pretreatment ends.

  The small hitting open process of step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "7". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the special winning opening and the timing of returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included is included. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hitting game state comes, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "8", and the small hitting open process ends.

  The small hit ending process of step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "8". This small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter / timer circuit) are performed. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I / O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

  After the command analysis process is executed in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light-emitting body such as the frame LED 9 and a decorative LED, and driving of the movable body 32. Controls for operating various effect devices such as actions are performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

  Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing in step S73.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetching notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the production control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, the processing for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command or the like specifying start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative display variable display (fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process ends. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative design in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative design.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the effect display during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the LED control board 14. Various effect controls are performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what has been done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect effect processing ends.

  The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6." Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

  The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . Further, in the small hitting production effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to end the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hitting finish effect. The value is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is finished.

  The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

  The big hit midfield effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and performs various kinds of effect control of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description was a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the game medium and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting a medal, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus).

  The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game can be executed not only by mounting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed by using the hardware resources of the other device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 080IW)
Next, the characteristic part 080IW will be described. First, a game state in the characteristic unit 080IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the characteristic unit 080IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) that is more likely to be a small hit than the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state, and in this characteristic part 080IW, the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). In the case of being controlled, in the case of being controlled to the low probability and the first KT state (low probability / first KT state), and in the case of being controlled to the high probability and the first KT state (high probability / first KT state). In some cases, the probability is high and the second KT state (high probability / second KT state) is controlled.

  In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, although a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in an open state, the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long and the small hit. Even if occurs, there are very few cases where the game balls are won in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 changes). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and is controlled to a high base state so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a long time. As will be described later, the second KT state in the KT state has a short opening time of the upstream side variable winning ball device 6B, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is transferred to the downstream special variable winning ball device 17. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur and is also controlled to a low base state to shorten the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B.

  Further, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this characteristic portion 080IW, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state at the time of a normal drawing is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, while the ratio of small hits is low when the first special symbol changes, the ratio of small hits is high when the second special symbol changes (however, it will be described later. (Except for the case of forced disengagement), the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated mainly by changing the second special symbol, which is a game state advantageous to the player.

  It should be noted that the configuration for setting the KT state in the gaming state in which a small hit is more likely than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state is the same as that in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern to be selected in the KT state to be shorter than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to the constant time in the KT state is higher than in the normal state, and the KT state is changed to the normal state. It may be a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 080IW, the time required for the game ball to pass through the passage gate 41 and reach the variable winning ball device 6B is set to be 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation positions of the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the group of nails forming the flow path of the game ball. As will be described later in detail, in the characteristic part 080IW, the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to be in an open state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. In the first KT state described later, the game ball passes. The time from the passage of the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41. Since it is shorter than the required time of 0.6 seconds, when one gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state. The game balls can be won as they are in the variable winning ball device 6B.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
9-1 and 9-2 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 9-1 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Moreover, FIG. 9-2 has shown the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of a 2nd special symbol is performed. In this example, it is configured such that it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. It is possible to confirm the current setting value and change the setting value by executing the setting confirmation processing and the setting change processing. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the present example shows a case in which the setting can be changed in six stages of setting values “1” to “6”. In addition, it is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in 6 steps, and for example, the setting can be changed in 2 to 5 steps or the setting can be changed in 7 steps or more.

  First, with reference to FIG. 9-1, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), in the non-probable variation state (low probability state), the setting value "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “247/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), in the probability variation state (high-probability state), the winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times as large as that in the non-probability variation state (low-probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “2470/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player.

  On the other hand, with regard to the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A) and (B), regardless of whether the setting value is “1” to “6”, the uncertain variation state (low probability The small hit probability is constant as “6298/65536” regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability change state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is also common to the non-probability variation state and the probability variation state. Even when the big hit probability is made different according to the set value while the small hit probability is made constant, as shown in FIGS. By making the setting values “1” to “6” different, the number of determination values for each setting value may be matched.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9-2, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 9-2 (A), in the non-probable variation state (low probability state), the setting value “1” is the lowest with the jackpot probability “205/65536”, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “247/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-2 (B), in the probability variation state (high-probability state), the winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times larger than that in the non-probability variation state (low-probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “2470/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player.

  On the other hand, with regard to the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 9-2 (A) and (B), regardless of whether the setting value is “1” to “6”, the uncertain variation state (low probability The small hit probability is constant as “62986/65536” regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability change state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is also common to the non-probability variation state and the probability variation state. However, in this example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 9-2), compared with the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 9-1), the small hit The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for the small hit determination when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. More than the number of judgment values for judgment). Even if the big hit probability is made different according to the set value while the small hit probability is made constant, as shown in FIGS. By making the setting values “1” to “6” different, the number of determination values for each setting value may be matched.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the determination value corresponding to the deviation is included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values “1” to “6” (FIG. 9). -1 and FIG. 9-2, there is no set value at which the outlier probability becomes 0). The determination value corresponding to the deviation is different according to the set value (depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). , The outliers are different).

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and for example, the deviation probability may be 0 (that is, a setting value that does not include the determination value corresponding to the deviation). For example, at the setting value “6” having the highest advantage (the highest jackpot probability), the deviation probability is 0, and the determination value corresponding to the deviation may not be included.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and for example, the small hit probability may be 0 (that is, the judgment value does not include the judgment value corresponding to the small hit). For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (FIG. 9-1), the small hit probability is uniformly set to 0, and the determination value for the small hit may not be included. Good.

  In addition, in FIGS. 9-1 (A), (B) and FIGS. 9-2 (A), (B), the probability of small hits is the same in the probability variation state (high probability state) and the non-determination variation state (low probability state). Although the probability of deviation is different, the probability of big hit in the probability change state (high-probability state) is higher than that in the non-probability change state (low-probability state). It is also possible to reduce and match the outlier probabilities. Further, even if the set values are different values of "1" and "2", for example, the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched. As a result, in a gaming machine in which the number of stages that can be substantially set is less than 6, or in a gaming machine in which there is no difference in advantage due to the setting changing function, a type of gaming machine having a 6-step setting changing function and a hardware / software configuration The manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type determination table)
9-3 (A) and 9 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", "first probability variation jackpot", based on the random number for jack type determination. It is a table referred to in order to determine either the "2nd probability variation big hit" or the "3rd probability variation big hit".

  As shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), in the characteristic part 080IW, regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6", when performing variable display of the first special symbol, There is a 35% chance of being determined as a "normal jackpot", a 30% chance of being determined as a "first probability variation jackpot", a 30% probability of being determined as a "second probability variation jackpot", and a 5% probability of being determined as a "first chance variation jackpot". 3 Probable variation jackpot ". Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), in the characteristic part 080IW, regardless of which of the setting values “1” to “6”, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Has a 35% chance of being determined as a "normal jackpot", a 5% chance of being determined as a "first probability variation jackpot", a 10% probability of being determined as a "second probability variation jackpot", and a 50% probability of being determined. It is decided to be the "third probability variation jackpot".

  The "normal big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of four rounds and is shifted to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game state. When shifting to the low-probability / high-base state, the low-probability / high-base state is maintained until the variable display of 50 times is completed or the next big hit occurs. When the variable display is completed 50 times, the low probability / low base state is entered.

  The "first probability variable big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of four rounds and is shifted to a positive change state (high probability state) after the end of the big hit game state. In this case, depending on the gaming state when the variable display is stopped and the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) or high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) ). When shifting to the high-probability / high-base state, the high-probability / high-base state is maintained until the variable display of 50 times or 100 times is completed or the next big hit occurs. When the variable display is completed 50 times or 100 times, the high probability / low base state is entered. Further, when the high probability / low base state is entered, the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  The "second probability variation big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 10 rounds and is shifted to the probability change state (high probability state) after the end of the big hit game state. In this case, depending on the gaming state when the variable display is stopped and the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) or high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) ). When transitioning to the high-probability / high-base state, the high-probability / high-base state is maintained until the variable display of 50 times is completed or the next big hit occurs. Further, when the variable display is completed 50 times, the high probability / low base state is entered. Further, when the high probability / low base state is entered, the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  The "third probability variation big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 10 rounds and is shifted to the probability change state (high probability state) after the end of the big hit game state. In this case, the variable display is stopped and the high-probability / low-base state (high-probability / second KT state) is entered regardless of the game state when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. Further, when the high probability / low base state is entered, the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  In this example, the high-probability / low-base state (second KT state) is more advantageous than the high-probability / high-base state (first KT state) because it is easier and easier for game balls to enter the special winning opening during the small hit game. Therefore, in this example, the "third probability variation big hit" is the most advantageous big hit type, the "second probability variation big hit" is the next most advantageous big hit type, and the "first probability variation big hit" is the next most advantageous. It is a big hit type, and "normal big hit" is the most disadvantageous big hit type.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-3, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the selection probability of “normal big hit”, “first certainty variation big hit”, and “second certainty variation big hit” Since it is high, if the variation display of the first special symbol is executed during the high probability / low base state (second KT state) to be a big hit, the high probability / low base state (second KT state) is likely to end. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, since the selection probability of the "third probability variable jackpot" is high, the variable display of the second special symbol during the high probability / low base state (second KT state). Is executed and a big hit occurs, the high probability / low base state (second KT state) is likely to continue.

  Further, in this example, in the normal symbol process process (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the variable display result of the normal symbol is a hit (per ordinary symbol), and the normal symbol is determined based on the determination result. The control for performing the variable display is performed. In this example, 99/100 is uniformly applied regardless of whether the state is the probable variation state, the KT state, or the high base state. With the probability of, it is decided to be a normal symbol. Further, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set, and if the high base flag is set (in the high base state), the variable winning ball device 6B. Is controlled to an open state for a long period of 5.5 seconds, and if the high base flag is not set (if it is a low base state), the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a short period of 0.2 seconds. Control.

(Variation pattern table)
9-4 to 9-6 are explanatory views showing the variation patterns (variation time) of the special symbols and the decorative symbols used in the characteristic part 080IW. EXT shown in FIGS. 9-4 to 9-6 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 9-4 to 9-6, nine types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 12 for the first special symbol and the decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the decorative symbol. 34 types of # 01 to # 34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, the variation pattern #n (n = 01 to 09 or 01 to 34) means both the first variation pattern #n and the second variation pattern #n.

  When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for non-KT time shown in FIG. 9-4 (A) The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 06.

  Further, if the variation display of the 50th variation (that is, the low variation / final variation in the first KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is executed , The low probability / first KT time shown in FIG. 9-4 (B) and the first special symbol variation pattern table for the 50th variation are selected, and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed as the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state, one of the first variation patterns # 07 to # 09 Is decided. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (G), in the fluctuation display of the 50th fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the first fluctuation patterns # 07 to # 09 are determined to have a relatively short fluctuation time of 5 seconds.

  When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, if it is a KT state other than the final variation in the low probability / first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state) In, the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for other KT time shown in FIG. 9-4 (C) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in other KT states, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 10 to # 12.

  When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT time shown in FIG. 9-5 (D) The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (D), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be off, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. In addition, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined even when it is determined to be a small hit, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. In addition, when it is determined to be a big hit, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

  In this characteristic part 080IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed even in the non-KT state and a small hit occurs, a situation can be expected in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected due to the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening. Will end up. Therefore, in this characteristic portion 080IW, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (D), even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variable time is extremely lengthened and the frequency of execution of the variable display is increased. The number of small hits is reduced to reduce the occurrence frequency of the small hits, thereby preventing a situation in which the small hits are aimed at to obtain a prize ball even in the non-KT state. In the characteristic part 080IW, the “frequent occurrence frequency of small hits” is, for example, the occurrence rate of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, small hits per unit time. Is higher than in the normal state.

  In addition, in this characteristic part 080IW, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (D), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, the variation time is obtained even in the case of a big hit. By relatively lengthening to 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the act of unreasonably aiming at a prize ball due to winning in the special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the first reserved memory in comparison with the case of a small hit. There is.

  When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of low probability / first KT state, the number of fluctuations after ending the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state The variation pattern table is selected according to In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the low probability / first KT shown in FIG. 9-5 (E) and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the first variation are selected and varied. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (E), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Will be decided.

  As shown in FIG. 9-5 (E), when it is determined that there is a deviation as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, the variation time is shortened to 5 seconds and the second variation pattern # 04 of the shortened variation is set. It is determined. Further, when it is determined that a small hit is the first change of the low probability / first KT state, the second change pattern # 05 (the second start winning opening is opened) is a relatively long change time of 7 seconds for the small hit. (Variation pattern for preparation). As described above, in the characteristic part 080IW, when the first KT state is controlled, although the frequency of small hits increases, the variable winning ball device 6B is actually opened by extending the opening time of the special winning prize. The special winning opening in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in a state immediately after shifting to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately generated. If the device 17 is controlled to be in the open state, a considerable number of game balls may win the special winning opening. Therefore, in this characteristic portion 080IW, in the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 of the variable winning ball device 6B before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning prize ball device 17 to the open state after allowing a sufficient time for all the game balls accumulated on the bottom surface member to drop, thereby enabling winning into the special winning opening, This prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. In addition, when it is determined as a big hit as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

  In the case of executing the variable display of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations after finishing the big hit game based on the normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state, the low value shown in FIG. 9-5 (F) is displayed. The probability / first KT time and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the 2nd to 49th fluctuations are selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (F), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2-49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation patterns # 07 to # 13 It is decided to either. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (F), when it is determined that the low probability / the second KT state of the 2nd to 49th variation is the deviation, the second variation pattern # of the shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds # In some cases, the second fluctuation pattern # 08 having a shortening fluctuation of 07 or a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the low probability / the 1st KT state is the 2nd to 49th variation and the deviation, the second variation pattern # 12 with reach may be determined. Further, when it is determined that the small hit is the second to 49th fluctuations of the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds and the second fluctuation pattern # 10 of the shortened fluctuation or the fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. The second fluctuation pattern # 11 of the shortened fluctuation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined as the small hit as the 2-49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 12 with reach may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns # 07 and # 10 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second fluctuation patterns # 08 and # 11 include one or more second reserved memories. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the pending storage is quickly consumed and the operating rate is increased. Further, when it is determined that the big hit is the second to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 13 with reach is determined.

  Also, if the variation display of the 50th variation (that is, the low variation / final variation in the first KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is executed , The low-probability / first KT time and the 50th variation second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-5 (G) are selected, and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (G), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state, one of the second variation patterns # 14 to # 16. Will be decided. As shown in FIG. 9-5 (G), in the variable display of the 50th variation in the low probability / first KT state, the shutter effect is executed on the image display device 5, and the variation time is relatively short as 5 seconds. 2 fluctuation patterns # 14 to # 16 are determined.

  In addition, in this characteristic part 080IW, as shown in FIG. 9-4, when it is a big hit in the variation display of the first special symbol during the other KT state, the first variation pattern # with a variation time of 10 seconds # It is configured to determine 10. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit change of the first special symbol is set to a long change time, Since the variation of the second special symbol executed during the big hit variation of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced outfall, the forced outfall frequently occurs even though the second KT state and the player is a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profit from. Therefore, in this characteristic part 080IW, by changing the variation time of the big hit variation of the first special symbol to a short variation time, the big hit game state based on the variation of the first special symbol is generated before the frequent occurrence of forced deviation. It is configured.

  In addition, unlike the characteristic part 080IW, even when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the big hit variation of the first special symbol, the configuration of the variation of the second special symbol is not forced out (for example, the first Special symbol big hit symbol When the second special symbol is changing at the time of stop, if the gaming machine of the second special symbol is forced out), the variation time of the first special symbol big hit in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit is the same short change time as the deviation, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from the small hit. Therefore, if the variation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long variation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that at least a plurality of small hits can occur. (For example, 1 minute) is ensured.

  When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, if the high probability / first KT state, the big probability game based on the first probability variation big hit or the second probability variation big hit that triggered the high probability / first KT state The variation pattern table is selected according to the number of variations after the end. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the high probability / first KT shown in FIG. 9-6 (H) and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the first variation are selected and varied. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, one of the second variation patterns # 17 to # 21. Will be decided.

  As in the case of the first change in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (H), the change time is also determined when the first change in the high probability / first KT state is a deviation. The second variation pattern # 17 with a shortened variation as short as 5 seconds may be determined. On the other hand, when the first variation of the high probability / first KT state is determined to be a deviation, the second variation pattern # 18 with reach may be determined. Also, when the small hit is determined as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern (second variation pattern # 19) for the second start winning opening opening preparation may be determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (H), when it is determined that the big variation is the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

  Further, in the case of executing the variation display after the second variation after the jackpot game based on the first probability variation big hit or the second probability variation big hit that triggered the high probability / first KT state, if the variation display after the second variation is executed, FIG. 9-6 The high probability / (1) high probability / first KT and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the second fluctuation and thereafter are selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second variation after the high probability / first KT state, any of the second variation patterns # 22 to # 28. Will be decided.

  Note that, as in the case of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (I), when it is determined that there is a deviation after the second fluctuation of the high probability / first KT state, In some cases, the second variation pattern # 22 has a shortened variation with a variation time of as short as 5 seconds, or the second variation pattern # 23 has a variation with a shortened variation time of 1 second. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a deviation after the second variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 24 with reach may be determined. In addition, when it is determined that the small hit is the second variation of the high probability / first KT state and thereafter, the variation time is shortened to 5 seconds and the second variation pattern # 25 of the variation or the variation time is shortened to 1 second. The second fluctuation pattern # 26 of fluctuation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit has occurred after the second variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 27 with reach may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns # 22 and # 25 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second fluctuation patterns # 23 and # 26 are stored when one or more second reserved memories are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the pending storage is quickly consumed and the operating rate is increased. In addition, when it is determined that the big hit is the second variation after the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

  When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of high probability / second KT state, the high probability / second KT variation pattern table for the second KT shown in FIG. 9-6 (J) The variation pattern is selected and determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (J), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 29 to # 34. ..

  As shown in FIG. 9-6 (J), when it is determined that there is a deviation in the high probability / second KT state, the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 29 with a short variation of 1.5 seconds. In some cases, the second fluctuation pattern # 30 of the normal fluctuation having the fluctuation time of 5 seconds may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the high probability / second KT state is a deviation, the second variation pattern # 31 with reach may be determined. In addition, when it is determined as a small hit in the high probability / second KT state, when the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 32 with a short variation time of as short as 1.5 seconds, or when the variation time is usually 5 seconds. The second fluctuation pattern # 33 of fluctuation may be determined. Further, when it is determined that the big hit in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 34 with reach is determined.

  Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Further, FIG. 9-7 (1) shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, and FIG. 9-7 (2) shows each in the second KT state. The open patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 are shown.

  First, an opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 9-7 (1). As shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed on the normal symbol display device 20, When it is determined to be a normal symbol, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20, and when it is determined to be out, the offset symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20. In this characteristic part 080IW, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), the variation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the winning symbol or the deviating symbol is 0.2 seconds. ing. When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds is set. After the passage, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port.

  When the game ball is won in the second start winning port when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a small hit, The small hitting symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball is won in the special winning opening. It becomes possible. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), the opening time of the downstream special variable winning ball device 17 is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas the upstream variable winning ball device 17 is short. 6B has a long opening time of 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a special winning opening (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 variable displays).

  In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is finished, the opening of the next variable winning ball device 6B can be performed by the following normal symbol. It is after elapse of at least 0.5 seconds which is a total of the variation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds and the second starting winning opening opening pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 080IW, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as the interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 080IW, in the first KT state, after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state. Usually after 0.5 seconds which is the total of the variation time of the symbol 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds and the second starting winning opening opening pretreatment time 0.1 seconds, the game ball is The time required to reach the variable winning ball apparatus 6B after passing through the passage gate 41 is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state in the state where the normal symbol is not changed, Normally, the variable winning ball device 6B is already opened because it is shorter than the time it takes for the gaming ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after the gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not changed. When controlled to the state, the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbols are not changed are easy to win in the variable winning ball device 6B.

  Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 9-7 (2). As shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 executes the variable display of the normal symbol, When it is determined to be a normal symbol, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20, and when it is determined to be out, the offset symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20. In this characteristic part 080IW, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 1.0 second, and the symbol fixing time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the off symbol is 0.2 second. ing. When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), after the symbol fixing time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second starting winning opening opening process time of 2.6 seconds is set. After a lapse of time, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port.

  When the game ball is won in the second start winning port when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a small hit, The small hitting symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball is won in the special winning opening. It will be possible.

  In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extremely short at 0.2 seconds. Further, in this characteristic part 080IW, in the second KT state, at least 3.8 seconds as an interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened (ordinary symbol variation time 1.0 seconds + symbol determination time 0). A relatively long period of 0.2 seconds + second start winning opening opening pre-processing 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), the open time of the upstream variable winning ball apparatus 6B is short and the interval period (closed period) is long. It is easy for the game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and it is easy for the game ball to enter the special winning opening.

  In the second KT state, since a game ball can easily enter the special winning opening and a prize ball is easily obtained, this example is also called "small hit RUSH". In the second KT state, "small hit RUSH" Characters such as “” are displayed.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 080IW, in the second KT state, after the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state. It is after the total of 3.8 seconds which is the total of the variation time of the normal symbol of 1.0 second, the symbol fixing time of 0.2 seconds and the second starting winning opening opening pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds, and the game ball is The time required to reach the variable winning ball apparatus 6B after passing through the passage gate 41 is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, Normally, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state because it is longer than the time it takes for the gaming ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after the gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not changed. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before being controlled to. Therefore, in the second KT state, the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbols are not changed are difficult to win in the variable winning ball device 6B.

  In addition, in this characteristic part 080IW, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbols and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is a normal symbol process process by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103). This is performed by executing (see step S26). Further, the game control microcomputer 100, in the normal symbol process process of step S26, whether the game state is a probability change state (high probability state), whether in the non-KT state, the first KT state or the second KT state. Regardless of whether there is a big hit game state or not, it is determined with the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%) whether or not to be a universal figure hit.

  In the characteristic part 080IW, the variation time of the normal symbol and the symbol determination time are the same at 0.2 seconds each in the first KT state and the second KT state, and the second starting winning opening opening pre-processing time is the second. A case has been shown in which the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is made different by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be different by changing the variation time and the symbol determination time between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second starting winning opening opening processing after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and if the second starting winning opening opening processing time is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. The variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to have a different closing period (interval period). Particularly, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is shortened by any of the above methods, the winning of the special winning opening in the first KT state can be suppressed. ..

  As will be described later, in the characteristic unit 080IW, in the first KT state, the high base state is set by setting the high base flag indicating the high base state, and as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1). As described above, the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is controlled to be opened for a long time. Further, in the second KT state, the high base flag is not set and the low base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2). ing.

  Note that, for example, a special flag (open extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1). The variable winning ball device 6B is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, the variable winning ball device 6B shown in FIG. 9-7 (2) is opened for a short time. You may comprise so that it may control by a 2 opening pattern (short opening). That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may be set not to be set in other states including the big hit game state.

  Even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened when the low probability / last variation display in the first KT state is executed. For example, in the shortened variation period of the special symbol of 50 times of the low probability / first KT state, the special flag may be deleted in response to the 49th variation stop of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the long open of the variable winning ball device 6B when performing the left-handed notification after the low probability / first KT state ends. be able to.

  As described above, in the case of configuring the variable winning ball device 6B using the opening control flag (special flag) of the variable winning ball device 6B, a flag for shortening fluctuation of the variable display of the special symbol is further used. The variable display of the special symbol may be controlled in this case, and in this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be separately managed.

  Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-circuited open during the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the probability of opening the variable winning ball device 6B is high in the low probability / non-KT state (left hit state), only a few game balls are operated to be fired. Thus, it is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 6B from winning, and it is possible to prevent the right hitting operation from being performed during the low probability / non-KT state.

  In the characteristic part 080IW, as shown in FIG. 9-7, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, in the case where the variable display of the second special symbol having a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is in a state in which the normal symbol is in a variation stop and the normal symbol is not stored. This is because the device 6B is in a closed state, and it is possible to capture with the aim of the variation stop timing of the second special symbol (in the case of a small hit, if the variation time of the normal symbol is long, the passage gate). The variable winning ball device 6B does not open by the time the game ball that has passed through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special winning opening can be won. On the other hand, in this characteristic part 080IW, by shortening the variation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened before the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Since it is set to be started, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the firing operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

(Direction control command)
9-8 and 9-9 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 9-8, commands 8000 (H) to 800C (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are decorations that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of special symbols. It is a production control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of a symbol. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the production control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 800C (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), it starts variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5. Control.

  The command 9001 (H) is a production control command (display result 1 designation command) (deletion designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is designated as a margin. Command 9002 (H) is a production control command (display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot. Command 9003 (H) is a production control command (display result 3 designation command (first probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is the first probability variation big hit. Is. Command 9004 (H) is a production control command (display result 4 designation command (second probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is the second probability variation big hit. Is. Command 9005 (H) is a production control command (display result 5 designation command (third probability variation jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is the third probability variation jackpot. Is. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (small hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

  Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 6 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this characteristic unit 080IW, since the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, the display control instruction command received by the production control CPU 120 immediately before the first variation pattern command is It can be determined that it is a display result designation command for the first special symbol, the display result designation command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be a display result designation command for the second special symbol, so the display result Although the designation command can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be different.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send a display result designation command, but changes patterns corresponding to normal big hit / first probability variation big hit / second probability variation big hit / third probability variation big hit / small hit / off You may make it determine the command and CPU120 for production control may determine the stop design of a decorative design based on the received variation pattern command.

  Command 9C00 (H) is a production control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) that specifies that the right-handed indicator 26 has finished lighting. Command 9C01 (H) is a production control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) that specifies that the right-handed indicator 26 has started lighting.

  Command A000 (H) is a production control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. Command A001 (H) is a production control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

  Command A002 (H) is a production control command (first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify to forcibly stop the variable display of the first special symbol. Command A003 (H) is a production control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

  Command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is a production control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designating command) for designating the start of the big hit game. B001 (H) is a production control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the big hit game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) that specifies the end of the small hit game.

  Command B1XX (H) is a production control command (display command during the opening of the special winning opening) for designating the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds displayed in "XX" is set. Command B2XX (H) is a production control command (display command after opening the special winning opening) that specifies display after the round during the big hit game (display of interval between rounds).

  The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening winning designation command) that specifies that the game ball has won in the special winning opening. Command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning a prize winning designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning award designation command) indicating that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning award designation command) indicating that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening in a state where the second number of reserved memories has not reached 4. It should be noted that a command indicating the first reserved memory number may be transmitted as the first valid start winning award designation command and a command indicating the second reserved memory number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning award designation command. Then, the first effective start winning award designating command and the second effective starting award winning designating command are commands indicating that there is a starting winning.

  Command C801 (H) is a production control command (gate passage designation command) that designates that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

  Command D000 (H) is a production control command (first customer) that specifies that it is in the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first reserved memory is not stored). Waiting demo display designation command). Command D001 (H) is a production control command (second customer) that specifies that it is in the second customer waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second hold memory is not stored). Waiting demo display designation command). The first customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. The second customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

  The command E000 (H) is a production control command (low probability / non-KT background designating command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designating command) that designates background display when the gaming state is low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is a production control command (high accuracy / first KT background designating command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is a production control command (high-accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the high probability / second KT state.

  Command E1XX (H) is a production control command (setting value command) that specifies the setting value that is currently set. The set value is set to "XX". For example, when the set value is set to "1", the command E101 (H) is transmitted as the set value command. Further, for example, when the set value is set to "6", the command E106 (H) is transmitted as the set value command.

  When the production control CPU 120 (specifically, the production control CPU 120) mounted on the production control board 12 receives the above-mentioned production control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, 9-8 and the display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 9-9, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. Note that production control commands other than the production control commands shown in FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. For example, more detailed effect control commands related to the big hit game and effect control commands indicating the game state (for example, effect control commands indicating initialization commands) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(First special symbol normal processing)
9-10 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state where the first special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is the value indicating step S110A. The case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A is a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed on the first special symbol display device 4A.

  In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103), first, the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not (step 080IWS50A). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to small hit. In the case where the value does not indicate the ending process (step S128), it is not in the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) or the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

  If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved memory number (step 080IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is confirmed. If the first number of reserved memories is 0, the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS52A).

  If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. In the first random number buffer area (step 080IWS53A), decrement the value of the first reserved storage number by 1 (decrement the value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step 080IWS54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is calculated as follows: Stored in the save area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers are always the same as the order of the first reserved storage numbers = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like this. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the first reserved storage number and the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The extraction order is also saved so that it can be specified.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 080IWS55A). In this example, the setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 080IWS55A. The set value command is also sent when is executed.

  The timing for transmitting the set value command is not limited to that shown in this example.For example, the set value command may be transmitted at each end of the variable display, or the set value command may be transmitted during the variable display. It may be configured to do so.

  After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, the low probability / non-KT state is determined and the low probability / non-KT background designation command is issued, and the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, the low probability / first KT state is determined, and the low probability / first KT background designation command is set. When the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is on, it is high probability / first KT state. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, the high probability / second KT background designation command is determined to be the high probability / second KT state, and the high precision / second KT background designation command is determined. Send.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the second special symbol is changing (step 080IWS57A). Specifically, when the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set based on the variable display of the second special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing. When it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating, the process proceeds to step 080IWS67A without performing the processing from step 080IWS58A. As a result, when the variation of the first special symbol is started during the variation of the big bonus of the second special symbol, it is configured to be forcibly disregarded regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

  The method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 080IWS57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) which is out of alignment as a hitting random number is performed, and the process proceeds to step 080IWS59A to make a start winning prize. It may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which random number for hit determination has been acquired.

  In addition, for example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step 080IWS57A, the random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as the hit judgment random number without performing the processing of steps 080IWS58A to S63A, and the small value is set. By performing the hit determination, the hit determination may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which random number for hit determination was obtained at the time of winning the start prize.

  When the big hit of the second special symbol is not changing, the game controlling microcomputer 100 reads the hit judging random number from the first random number storing buffer (step 080IWS58A), and executes the big hit judging module (step 080IWS59A). The big hit determination module is a program that decides to make a big hit if the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined big hit determination value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step 080IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 080IWS61A). .. Then, it is determined whether the big hit type is a normal big hit, a first probability variation big hit, a second probability variation big hit, or a third probability variation big hit (step 080IWS62A) based on the hit type determination random number, and the big hit type is stored ( Step 080IWS63A) and step 080IWS67A.

  If the big hit is not made in step 080IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 080IWS64A). The small hitting determination module is a program that decides to make a small hit if the random number for hitting determination (may be a random number for small hitting determination) matches a predetermined small hitting determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step 080IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small hit flag indicating that a small hit will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol ( Step 080IWS66A). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS67A.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0" (step 080IWS67A), and if it is "0", step 080IWS74A. Move to. When the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, when it is in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 080IWS68A), It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 080IWS69A). If the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 080IWS74A. When the value of the high base number counter becomes “0”, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that the high base state is set (step 080IWS70A).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 080IWS71A). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if it is the probability variation state), the process proceeds to step 080IWS74A. If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, not the probability variation state), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the special symbol time saving flag indicating that the variable display of the special symbol is being shortened (step 080IWS72A). ). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is extended to the end of fluctuation (step 080IWS73A). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS74A.

  In this characteristic part 080IW, as will be described later, the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the variable display in the high base state is managed in the low probability / high base state when the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot is finished ( High probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) when controlled to low probability / first KT state) and variable display is executed 50 times, and at the end of a big hit game based on first probability variation big hit or second probability variation big hit. This is a case where the variable display is performed 50 times or 100 times under the control state. In the case of the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), it is determined as Y in steps 080IWS69A and S69B and N in steps 080IWS71A and S71B when the 50th variation display is started. Then, the high base flag is reset in steps 080IWS70A and S70B, and the special figure time saving flag is also reset in steps 080IWS72A and S72B, so that the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is entered. . On the other hand, in the case of the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), when the variable display of the 50th time or the 100th time is started, it is determined as Y in step 080IWS69A, S69B and the step 080IWS71A, It is determined to be Y in S71B, the high base flag is reset in steps 080IWS70A and S70B, and the high probability / low base state (second KT state) is entered.

  In addition, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right hitting state by continuing the right hitting notification, and as the gaming state, the high base state has ended, but the variation reduction common to the first KT state is shortened. It is a flag for setting the state and making it a production background common to the first KT state.

  Then, in step 080IWS74A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step 080IWS74A). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step 080IWS74A.

  In addition, in step 080IWS59A, in consideration of the game state, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit, using either the non-probability change big hit judgment table or the probability change big hit judgment table.

(First fluctuation pattern setting process)
9-11 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first sets the special symbol time saving flag or the lighting extension flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened. It is confirmed (step 080IWS1700A). In this example, the special symbol time saving flag and the lighting extension flag are set to perform the shortening control of the variable display of the special symbol, which makes it advantageous to execute the variable display of the second special symbol ( As shown in FIGS. 9-4 to 9-6), since a small hit is likely to occur, the KT state is controlled. If neither the special figure time saving flag nor the lighting extension flag is set (that is, not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses FIG. 9-4 as a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern. The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for non-KT time shown in (A) is selected (step 080IWS1701A).

  When the special time saving flag or the lighting extension flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the first for KT time as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. A variable pattern table for special symbols is selected (step 080IWS1702A). In step 080IWS1702A, if the lighting extension flag has been set (that is, if the last variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed), the CPU 103 proceeds to FIG. 9-4 (B). Shows the low probability / first KT and selects the first special symbol variation pattern table for the 50th variation.On the other hand, if the special symbol time saving flag is set, the others shown in FIG. The variable pattern table for the first special symbol for KT of is selected.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100, based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in step 080IWS1701A, S1702A, and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer, Which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 9D is to be determined (step 080IWS1703A). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, the variation pattern in which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

  When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1704A).

  In addition, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 080IWS1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets variation time data indicating the determined variation time to the first variation time timer and the variation time. While starting the measurement of (step 080IWS1705A), the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 080IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 080IWS1707A).

(First special symbol variation process)
9-12 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 080IWS1120A). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to small hit. It is a case where the value does not indicate the ending process (step S128), and it is neither during the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

  If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet transmitted, and the big hit type. Based on the determination result, control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1121A).

  Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step 080IWS1122A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step 080IWS1123A), performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 080IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 080IWS1135A).

  When the first variation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is being performed (step 080IWS1125A). Whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed, for example, whether the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to a process other than the second special symbol normal process is confirmed. It can be determined by If the variable display of the second special symbol is being displayed, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 080IWS1126A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 080IWS1127A). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 080IWS1128A) and also controls to send a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1129A).

  When it is determined to be Y in step 080IWS1125A and when it is determined to be Y in step 080IWS1126A, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the final variation in the low probability / high base state (first KT state), and then the variation display is ended. This is the case where the variable display of the second special symbol has been started before. In this case, in this example, by performing the processing of steps 080IWS1127A to S1129A, after starting the variation display of the first special symbol as the final variation in the low probability / high base state (first KT state), the variation display thereof If the variable display of the second special symbol is started before ending, the lighting extension flag is reset at the timing of the variable display of the second special symbol and the low probability / high base state is ended. However, the low probability / low base state (normal state) is set.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 080IWS1130A). Whether or not the big hit symbols are derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process, It can be determined by checking whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is to be set based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

  If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 080IWS1131A). In addition, whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag becomes a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process. , It can be determined by checking whether or not the second small hit flag, which indicates a small hit, is set on the basis of the variable display of the second special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the process is ended as it is.

  If the small-hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 080IWS1132A). . Whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined by, for example, checking whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the variation display of the first special symbol that is being executed is not a big hit, the process is ended as it is.

  If the variation display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a probability variation big hit (first probability variation big hit to third probability variation big hit) (step 080IWS1133A). ). Whether or not it is the probability variation big hit (first probability variation big hit to third probability variation big hit) can be determined by, for example, confirming the big hit type stored in step 080IWS63A. If it is a probability variation big hit (first probability variation big hit to third probability variation big hit), the process is ended as it is.

  In the case where a big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y in step 080IWS1130A), or when a small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 080IWS1131A), the probability variation big hit (first probability variation jackpot to the first) 3 Probable variation big hit) (that is, usually big hit) When the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed (Y in step 080IWS1132A, N in step 080IWS1133A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the effect control CPU 120 1 The control for transmitting the compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is performed (step 080IWS1134A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 080IWS1135A).

  By executing the processing of steps 080IWS1130A to S1134A, in this characteristic part 080IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit or while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, it is a small hit. In the case where the variable display of the first special symbol, which is usually a big hit, is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the big hit occurs simultaneously with the first special symbol and the second special symbol. We try to prevent the occurrence of small hits. In this case, on the CPU 120 side for effect control, when the variable display of the first special symbol is forced out, the variation of the decorative symbol is based on the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 080IWS1134A. As a display result, it is forcibly controlled to stop and display the symbol.

  In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol that is the probability big hit is being executed. In some cases, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 080IWS1133A), but in this case, based on the fact that the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit, the accessory control The value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S126), and the small hit game is started. Therefore, after the next timer interruption, it is determined as N in step 080IWS1120A, the processing in steps 080IWS1121A to S1135A is skipped, and the first variable time timer in step 080IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a sure variation big hit is being executed, during the small hit game, the first variation time timer Is suspended and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

  In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, during the variable display of the first special symbol that is out or a small hit. In some cases, the first special symbol variation process is ended as it is (see N in step 080IWS1132A). Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit, even when the variable display of the first special symbol that is a shift or a small hit is being executed, the first variation during the small hit game. The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hit game is finished, the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

(First special symbol stop processing)
9-13 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol stop process. In the first special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 080IWS2010A). If the probability variation flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation storage flag indicating that the game state at the end of the variable display was the probability variation state (step 080IWS2011A). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the high base flag or the lighting extension flag is set (step 080IWS2012A). If the high base flag or the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the high base storage flag indicating that the gaming state at the end of the variable display was the high base state (step 080IWS2013A).

  By executing the processing of steps 080IWS2010A to S2013A, in this example, it is temporarily recorded that the gaming state at the end of the variable display was the probable variation state or the high base state.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 080IWS2014A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 080IWS2015A). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 080IWS2016A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS2017A).

  In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) is provided on the right side of the game area, if the game state is controlled to the KT state, the person who has performed the right hitting operation. Is advantageous to the player, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. Therefore, in the present example, the right-handed indicator 26 is lit during the low probability / first KT state, but by performing the processing of steps 080IWS67A to S73A, the first special symbol as the 50th variation display. When the variable display is started, it is determined that the low probability / first KT state is ended, and the processing of steps 080IWS2014A to S2017A is executed, so that the low probability / first when the variable display of the first special symbol is ended. The 1KT state is ended and the normal state (non-KT state) is entered, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned off. However, as already described, by executing the processing of steps 080IWS1125A to S1129A, after starting the variation display of the first special symbol as the final variation in the low probability / first KT state, before ending the variation display. If the variable display of the second special symbol has been started, the low probability / high base state is ended at the timing of the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, and the low probability / low base state (normal state ) Is moved to.

  Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 080IWS2018A). In this case, if the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 080IWS1134A of the first special symbol fluctuation process, regardless of the determination result at the start of fluctuation, forced as the stop symbol of the first special symbol. The outlying design is displayed by derivation.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 080IWS2019A). When the first big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the big hit start flag indicating that the big hit is started (step 080IWS2020A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first big hit flag (step 080IWS2021A).

  Next, the CPU 103 controls the start of lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 080IWS2022A), and also controls the right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS2023A). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2032A.

  By executing the processing of step 080IWS2022A, S2023A, in this example, when the big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area in this example, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game. Therefore, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

  In this example, after the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. The display 26 may be configured to start lighting.

  If the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 080IWS2019A), the CPU 103 resets the probability variation storage flag and the high base storage flag if set (step 080IWS2024A). In this example, the probability variation storage flag and the high base storage flag are set by executing the processing of steps 080IWS2010A to S2013A, and it is temporarily recorded that the gaming state at the end of the variable display was the probability variation state or the high base state. However, if the deviating symbol or the small hit symbol is to be derived and displayed, the probability variation storage flag and the high base storage flag are reset by executing the processing of step 080IWS2024A.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 080IWS2025A). When the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS2026A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 080IWS2027A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step 080IWS2031A). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2032A.

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step 080IWS2032A).

  In this example, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, the right hitting notification that prompts the player to shoot a game ball to the right of the game area can be executed. There is. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, as a right hit notification, it is possible to execute a launch promotion alert that prompts the player to launch a game ball aiming at the passage gate 41. May be.

  In addition, in the state where the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, right-handing notification and launch promotion information are not executed, and in that state when the game ball wins the first start winning opening, right-handing notification and launch promotion information (In this case, because it is in the gate passage waiting state, even if the game ball wins the first starting winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol does not start immediately and becomes the first reserved memory) You may comprise.

  On the other hand, when the passage of the game ball at the passage gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the degree of recognition is low (for example, sound output of small volume or small screen display). Thus, it may be configured to perform a left-hand hit notification that prompts the player to shoot a game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected, a mode in which the degree of recognition is high (for example, a loud sound output or A left-handed notification may be provided by a large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, for the player who accidentally shoots the game ball to the right of the game area, while performing a slight left-handing notification while the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. For a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation, left-handed notification may be performed in a manner in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation can be urged by the clerk of the game store to return to the left-handed operation.

  Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of game balls detected at the passage gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. In addition, in the passage gate 41, when the game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and the second start winning opening and the special winning opening are more than a predetermined number. Even if a small number (eg, one) or more gaming balls are detected, the left-handed hit notification may be performed.

  Although the characteristic part 080IW displays the demo when a specific condition is satisfied, the pass gate 41, the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is displayed when the demo is displayed in the normal state. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demonstration display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be performed.

(Second special symbol normal processing)
9-14 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal processing is executed is a case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed in the second special symbol display device 4B.

  In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103), first, the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120) It is confirmed whether or not (step 080IWS50B). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to small hit. In the case where the value does not indicate the ending process (step S128), it is not in the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) or the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

  If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 080IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is confirmed. If the number of second reserved memories is 0, the second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS52B).

  If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. Stored in the second random number buffer area (step 080IWS53B), decrement the value of the second reserved storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the second reserved storage counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step 080IWS54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. Stored in the save area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved storage numbers are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved storage numbers = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like this. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 080IWS55B). In this example, the setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 080IWS55B, but the setting change processing (processing of changing the setting value) is performed when the power is turned on. The set value command is also sent when is executed.

  After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS56B). The specific method of transmitting the background designating command is the same as the process shown in step 080IWS56A of the first special symbol normal process.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the first special symbol is changing (step 080IWS57B). Specifically, when the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is based on the variation display of the first special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing. When it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating, the process proceeds to step 080IWS67B without performing the processing after step 080IWS58B. As a result, when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the variation of the big bonus of the first special symbol, the configuration is forcibly deviated regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

  The method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 080IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step 080IWS59B, so that at the time of starting winning. It may be forcibly deviated regardless of whether or not the random number for hit determination has been acquired.

  Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 080IWS57B, the random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as the hit determination random number without performing the processing in steps 080IWS58B to S63B, and the small value is set. By making the hit determination, the hit determination may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which random number for the hit determination was obtained at the time of winning the start prize.

  When the big hit of the first special symbol is not changing, the game controlling microcomputer 100 reads the hit judging random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 080IWS58B), and executes the big hit judging module (step 080IWS59B). The big hit determination module is a program that decides to make a big hit if the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined big hit determination value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step 080IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step 080IWS61B). . Then, based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the big hit type is a normal big hit, a first probability variation big hit, a second probability variation big hit, or a third probability variation big hit (step 080IWS62B), and the big hit type is stored ( Step 080IWS63B) and step 080IWS67B.

  If the big hit is not made in step 080IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 080IWS64B). The small hitting determination module is a program that decides to make a small hit if the random number for hitting determination (may be a random number for small hitting determination) matches a predetermined small hitting determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step 080IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that a small hit will be made based on the variable display of the second special symbol (( Step 080IWS66B). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS67B.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 080IWS67B), and if it is "0", shifts to step 080IWS74B. If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 080IWS68B), It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 080IWS69B). When the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 080IWS74B. When the value of the high base number counter becomes “0”, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that the high base state is set (step 080IWS70B).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 080IWS71B). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if it is the probability variation state), the process proceeds to step 080IWS74B. If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, not the probability variation state), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the special symbol time saving flag indicating that the variable display of the special symbol is being shortened (step 080IWS72B). ). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 080IWS73B). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS74B.

  Then, in step 080IWS74B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 080IWS74B). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step 080IWS74B.

  In addition, in step 080IWS59B, in consideration of the game state, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit, using either the non-probability change big hit determination table or the probability change big hit determination table.

  The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 9-11. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 9-11, the second variation pattern process is explained by replacing “first” with “second”. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step 080IWS1700A, and confirms whether the special figure time saving flag or the lighting extension flag is set. If neither the special figure time saving flag nor the lighting extension flag is set (that is, not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern as shown in FIG. The variable pattern table for the second special symbol for non-KT time shown in 5 (D) is selected. If the special time saving flag or the lighting extension flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set, and the variation count. Accordingly, as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for any KT shown in FIGS. 9-5 (E) to 9-6 (J) is selected. . For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), if it is the first variation, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-5 (E) If the 2nd to 49th variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-5 (F) is selected. If the 50th variation, the second variation shown in FIG. 9-5 (G). Select the variable pattern table for special symbols. Further, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability / first KT state), if it is the first variation, variation for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-6 (H) The pattern table is selected, and if it is the second variation or later, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-6 (I) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (in the case of high probability / second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-6 (J) is selected. It should be noted that the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the low probability / first KT time and the 50th variation shown in FIG. 9-5 (G) based on that the lighting extension flag is set. You may do it.

(Second special symbol variation process)
9-15 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 080IWS1120B). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to small hit. It is a case where the value does not indicate the ending process (step S128), and it is neither during the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

  If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet transmitted, and the big hit type. Based on the determination result, control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1121B).

  Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second variation time timer (step 080IWS1122B), and when the second variation time timer times out (step 080IWS1123B), performs control to send the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 080IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 080IWS1135B).

  When the second variation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is being performed (step 080IWS1125B). Whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed, for example, whether the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to a process other than the first special symbol normal process is confirmed. It can be determined by If the variable display of the first special symbol is being displayed, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 080IWS1126B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 080IWS1127B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 080IWS1128B) and also controls to send a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1129B).

  If Y is determined in step 080IWS1125B and Y is determined in step 080IWS1126B, the variation display of the second special symbol is started as the final variation in the low probability / high base state (first KT state), and then the variation display is ended. This is the case where the variable display of the first special symbol has been started before. In this case, in this example, by performing the processing of steps 080IWS1127B to S1129B, after starting the variation display of the second special symbol as the final variation in the low probability / high base state (first KT state), the variation display If the variable display of the first special symbol is started before ending, the lighting extension flag is reset at the timing of the variable display of the first special symbol and the low probability / high base state is ended. However, the low probability / low base state (normal state) is set.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 080IWS1130B). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process, It can be determined by checking whether or not the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is to be set based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

  If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 080IWS1131B). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process. , It can be determined by checking whether or not the first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set based on the variable display of the first special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the process is ended as it is.

  If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is a big hit (step 080IWS1132B). . Whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is a big hit can be determined by, for example, checking whether or not the second big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is not a big hit, the process is ended as it is.

  If the variation display of the second special symbol that is being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a probability variation big hit (first probability variation big hit to third probability variation big hit) (step 080IWS1133B). ). Whether or not it is the probability big jackpot (first probability variation big hit to third probability variation big hit) can be determined by, for example, checking the big hit type stored in step 080IWS63B. If it is a probability variation big hit (first probability variation big hit to third probability variation big hit), the process is ended as it is.

  When the big hit symbols are derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in step 080IWS1130B), or when the small hit symbols are derived and displayed (Y in step 080IWS1131B), the probability variation big hit (the first probability variation big hit to the first) 3 Probably strange big hit) (that is, usually big hit) When the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed (Y in step 080IWS1132B, N in step 080IWS1133B), the CPU 103 causes the CPU 120 for effect control to 2 Control to transmit a compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is performed (step 080IWS1134B). In this case, if the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 080IWS1135B).

  By executing the processing of steps 080IWS1130B to S1134B, in this characteristic part 080IW, when the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit or while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, it is a small hit. In the case where the variable display of the second special symbol, which is usually a big hit, is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are hit at the same time. We try to prevent the occurrence of small hits. In this case, on the production control CPU 120 side, when the variable display of the second special symbol is forced out, the variation of the decorative symbol is based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 080IWS1134B. As a display result, it is controlled to forcibly discontinue display of the symbol.

  In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol that is the probability big hit is being executed. In some cases, the second special symbol variation process is ended as it is (see Y in step 080IWS1133B), but in this case, based on the fact that the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit, the accessory control The value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S126), and the small hit game is started. Therefore, after the next timer interruption, it is determined as N in step 080IWS1120B, the processing in steps 080IWS1121B to S1135B is skipped, and the second variable time timer in step 080IWS1122B is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a sure variation big hit is being executed, during the small hit game, the second variation time timer Is suspended and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted.

  Further, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, during the variable display of the second special symbol that is out or a small hit. Also in some cases, the second special symbol variation process is ended as it is (see N in step 080IWS1132B). Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol is a small hit, even when the variable display of the second special symbol which is a deviation or a small hit is being executed, during the small hit game, the second variation The update of the time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hit game is finished, the update of the second variable time timer is restarted.

  With the above configuration, the remaining second reserved memory can be consumed in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the time saving state), and a big hit occurs at an unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, it is configured to provide a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol to the right of the game area ( In a gaming machine configured to be provided with a starting winning opening which is not a variable winning ball device) and which is configured to shift to a normal state via the time saving state of the first special symbol after the end of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) As described above, the configuration in which the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed may be applied. In this case, because the variation efficiency of the first special symbol is high, the frequency of small hits based on the variation display of the first special symbol is also high, but the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed accordingly. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second reserved memory in the normal state by increasing the frequency of playing, and further suppress the occurrence of the big hit at an unintended timing when the player is absent. You can

(Second special symbol stop processing)
9-16 and 9-17 are flowcharts showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 080IWS2010B). If the probability variation flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation storage flag (step 080IWS2011B). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the high base flag or the lighting extension flag is set (step 080IWS2012B). If the high base flag or the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the high base storage flag (step 080IWS2013B).

  By executing the processing of steps 080IWS2010B to S2013B, in this example, it is temporarily recorded that the gaming state at the end of the variable display was the probable variation state or the high base state.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 080IWS2014B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 080IWS2015B). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 080IWS2016B) and also controls to send a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS2017B).

  In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) is provided on the right side of the game area, if the game state is controlled to the KT state, the person who has performed the right hitting operation. Is advantageous to the player, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is lit during the low probability / first KT state, but by performing the processing of steps 080IWS67B to S73B, the second special symbol as the 50th variation display. When the variable display is started, it is determined that the low probability / first KT state is to be ended, and the processing of steps 080IWS2014B to S2017B is executed, so that the low probability / first when the variable display of the second special symbol is ended. The 1KT state is terminated and the normal state (non-KT state) is entered, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned off. However, as already described, by executing the processing of steps 080IWS1125B to S1129B, after starting the variable display of the second special symbol as the final change in the low probability / first KT state, before ending the variable display. If the variable display of the first special symbol has been started, the low probability / high base state is ended at the timing of the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the low probability / low base state (normal state ) Is moved to.

  Next, the CPU 103 causes the stop symbol of the second special symbol to be derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 080IWS2018B). In this case, if the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 080IWS1134B of the second special symbol variation process, regardless of the determination result at the start of variation, it is forced as the stop symbol of the second special symbol. The outlying design is derivatized and displayed.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 080IWS2019B). When the second big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the big hit start flag (step 080IWS2020B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second big hit flag (step 080IWS2021B).

  Next, the CPU 103 controls to start the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 080IWS2022B) and also controls to send the right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS2023B). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2032B.

  By executing the processing of step 080IWS2022B, S2023B, in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is started to be lit when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area in this example, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game. Therefore, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

  If the second jackpot flag is not set (N in step 080IWS2019B), the CPU 103 resets the probability variation storage flag and the high base storage flag if set (step 080IWS2024B). In this example, the probability variation storage flag and the high base storage flag are set by executing the processing of steps 080IWS2010B to S2013B, and it is temporarily recorded that the gaming state at the end of the variable display was the probability variation state or the high base state. However, if the deviating symbol or the small hit symbol is to be derived and displayed, the probability variation storage flag and the high base storage flag are reset by executing the processing of step 080IWS2024B.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 080IWS2025B). When the second small hit flag is set, control for transmitting a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (step 080IWS2026B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 080IWS2027B).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step 080IWS2028B). If the special drawing time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 080IWS2029B), and right with respect to the effect control CPU 120. The control for transmitting the striking and lighting start designation command is performed (step 080IWS2030B).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step 080IWS2031B). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2032B.

  By executing the processing of steps 080IWS2029B and S2030B, in the present example, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area in the present example, it is better for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the small hit game. Advantageously, the right-handed indicator 26 is illuminated.

  However, in this example, even if the small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, if the KT state is in progress, the right-handed indicator 26 should already be lit. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process of step 080IWS2028B, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started in duplicate. Also, the process of transmitting the right-handed lighting start designation command is not performed.

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 080IWS2032B).

(Normal processing for accessory control)
FIG. 9-18 is a flowchart showing the accessory control normal processing (step S120) in the accessory control process processing. In the accessory control normal processing, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the big hit start flag is set (step 080IWS2101). If the big hit start flag is not set, the process is terminated.

  If the big hit start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the big hit start flag (step 080IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets a big winning opening pre-opening timer (step 080IWS2103), sets round 1 opening pattern data according to the big hit type (step 080IWS2104), and sets "1" in a round number counter indicating the number of big hits. Is set (step 080IWS2105).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 080IWS2106).

(Gate passage waiting processing)
FIG. 9-19 is a flowchart showing a gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the accessory control process process. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input (step 080IWS2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the processing ends. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, the high base flag, and the special drawing time saving flag if set, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 ( Step 080IWS2502). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a big hit start designation command (step 080IWS2503), and sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit opening preprocessing (step 080IWS2504).

  In this characteristic part 080IW, by executing the gate passage waiting process, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the second special symbol, the big hit game is not started immediately, but the passage gate 41 is played. It is configured to shift to the big hit game on condition that the ball passes and is detected by the gate switch 21.

(Big hit end processing)
9-20 and 9-21 are flowcharts showing the big hit ending process (step S125) in the accessory control process process. In the big hit end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step 080IWS2200), and when the big hit end display timer is set, moves to step 080IWS2202. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 corresponds to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time). A value is set (step 080IWS2201), and the process ends.

  In step 080IWS2202, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer (step 080IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (step 080IWS2203). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has passed (Y in step 080IWS2203), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the type of the big hit that has ended this time is a normal big hit (step 080IWS2204). Whether or not it is a normal big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step 080IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 080IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process. If it is a normal big hit, the CPU 103 sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 080IWS2205), and sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 080IWS2206). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step 080IWS2207). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, in the case of a normal big hit, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

  If it is not a normal big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the big hit that has ended this time is the first probability variation big hit (step 080IWS2208). Whether or not the first probability variation big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step 080IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 080IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process. If it is the first probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (step 080IWS2209), and sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 080IWS2210).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation storage flag is set (step 080IWS2211). If the probability variation storage flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the high base storage flag is set (step 080IWS2212). If the high base storage flag is not set (N in step 080IWS2212), that is, if it is a low probability / low base state at the time of derivation display of the big hit symbol, the high base flag is set to shift to the high base state. Together with (step 080IWS2213), the high base number counter is set to "100" (step 080IWS2214). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, when it is the first probability variation big hit in the case of low probability / low base state at the time of derivation display of the big hit symbol, it is controlled to high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and thereafter When the variable display is completed 100 times, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is changed to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

  If the high base storage flag is set (Y in step 080IWS2212), that is, if it is a low probability / high base state at the time of derivation display of the big hit symbol, the high base flag is set to shift to the high base state. Together with (step 080IWS2215), "50" is set in the high base number counter (step 080IWS2216). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, when the first probability variation big hit in the case of low probability / high base state at the time of derivation display of the big hit symbol, it is controlled to high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and thereafter, When the variable display is completed 50 times, the control is changed from the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

  If the probability variation storage flag is set (Y in step 080IWS2211), the CPU 103 checks whether the high base storage flag is set (step 080IWS2217). If the high base storage flag is set (Y in step 080IWS2217), that is, if it is a high probability / high base state at the time of derivation display of the big hit symbol, the high base flag is set to shift to the high base state. Together with (step 080IWS2218), the high base number counter is set to "50" (step 080IWS2219). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, when the high probability / high base state at the time of derivation display of the big hit symbol and the first probability variation big hit, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is controlled, and thereafter, When the variable display is completed 50 times, the control is changed from the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

  On the other hand, if the high base storage flag is not set (N in step 080IWS2217), that is, if the high-probability / low-base state is present at the time of derivation display of the big hit symbol, the process directly proceeds to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, when the high probability / low base state at the time of derivation display of the big hit symbol, if the first probability variation big hit, without going through the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), Immediately controlled to high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

  If it is not the first probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the big success ended this time is the second probability variation big hit (step 080IWS2220). Whether or not the second probability variation big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step 080IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 080IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process. If it is the second probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (step 080IWS2221), and sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 080IWS2222).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation storage flag is set (step 080IWS2223). If the probability variation storage flag is not set (N in step 080IWS2223), that is, if the high probability symbol is in the low probability / low base state or the low probability / high base state at the time of derivation display, the high base flag is set. While shifting to the high base state (step 080IWS2224), "50" is set to the high base number counter (step 080IWS2225). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, when the high probability / low base state or the low probability / high base state when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed is the second probability variation big hit, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) ), And when the variable display is completed 50 times, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is changed to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

  On the other hand, if the probability variation storage flag is set (Y in step 080IWS2223), that is, if the high-probability / high-base state or the high-probability / low-base state at the time of derivation display of the big hit symbol, the process directly proceeds to step 080IWS2228. To do. Therefore, in the case of a high probability / high base state or a high probability / low base state when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, if the second probability variation big hit occurs, a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) ), The high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) is immediately controlled.

  If it is not the second probability variation big hit (that is, if it is the third probability variation big hit), the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (step 080IWS2226), and sets the special figure time saving flag to the KT state. The process moves (step 080IWS2227). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS2228. Therefore, regardless of the game state at the time of derivation display of the jackpot pattern, if the third probability variation jackpot, high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) immediately without high probability / Controlled to a low base state (high probability / second KT state).

  Next, the CPU 103 resets the probability variation storage flag and the high base storage flag if set (step 080IWS2228). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step 080IWS2229).

(Small hit end processing)
FIG. 9-22 is a flowchart showing a small hit ending process (step S128) in the accessory control process process. In the small hit end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 080IWS2300), and when the small hit end display timer is set, moves to step 080IWS2302. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 causes the small hit end display timer to display a time corresponding to the time when the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to time is set (step 080IWS2301), and the process ends.

  In step 080IWS2302, the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 080IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 080IWS2303). If not, the process ends.

  If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 080IWS2303), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step 080IWS2304). If the special drawing time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the right-handed indicator 26 is lighting (step 080IWS2305). If the right-handed indicator 26 is on, the CPU 103 performs control to end the right-handed indicator 26 (step 080IWS2306), and at the same time, sends a right-handed illumination end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 080IWS2307).

  In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit in the non-KT state, the right hit indicator 26 is started to be turned on at the start of the small hit game (steps 080IWS2028B to S2030B). ), By executing the processing of steps 080IWS2304 to S2307, the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 ends at the end of the small hit game.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step 080IWS2308).

(Transition of game state)
Here, the transition of the game state in the characteristic unit 080IW will be described. FIG. 9-23 is an explanatory view showing a list of game states controlled after the big hit game for each big hit type. In addition, FIG. 9-24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a way of transition of the game state in the characteristic unit 080IW.

  As shown in FIG. 9-23, in the case of a normal big hit, regardless of the game state when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (first KT state) after the big hit game, and then 50 When the variable display of the number of times is finished, the low probability / high base state (first KT state) is finished and the low probability / low base state (normal state) is controlled (see steps 080IWS2205 to S2207).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-23, when the first probability variation big hit, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, if it is in a low probability / low base state (normal state), high probability / high after the big hit game. When the variable state is controlled to the base state (first KT state) and then the variable display is completed 100 times, the high probability / high base state (first KT state) is changed to the high probability / low base state (second KT state) ( See steps 080IWS2209 to S2214).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-23, in the case of the first probability variation big hit, in the high probability / high base state (first KT state) or high probability / high base state (first KT state) when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed. If there is, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (first KT state) after the big hit game, and then, after 50 times of variable display, the high probability / high base state (first KT state) is changed to high probability / It is controlled to the low base state (second KT state) (see steps 080IWS2209 to S2212, S2215, S2216, S2217 to S2219).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-23, when the first probability variation big hit, when it is a high probability / low base state (second KT state) at the time of derivation display of the big hit symbol, high probability / high base state The high probability / low base state (second KT state) is immediately controlled after the big hit game without going through the (first KT state) (see steps 080IWS2209 to S2211 and S2217).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-23, in the case of the second probability variation big hit, in the low probability / low base state (first KT state) or the low probability / high base state (first KT state) at the time of derivation display of the big hit symbol. If there is, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (first KT state) after the big hit game, and then, after 50 times of variable display, the high probability / high base state (first KT state) is changed to high probability / It is controlled to the low base state (second KT state) (see steps 080IWS2221-S2225).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-23, when the second probability variation big hit, in the high probability / high base state (first KT state) or high probability / low base state (second KT state) at the time of derivation display of the big hit symbol. If there is, it is controlled to the high probability / low base state (second KT state) immediately after the big hit game without going through the high probability / high base state (first KT state) (see steps 080IWS2221-S2223).

  As shown in FIG. 9-23, when the third probability variation big hit, regardless of the game state when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit game without going through the high probability / high base state (first KT state) Immediately after that, the high probability / low base state (second KT state) is controlled (see steps 080IWS2226 to S2227).

  In this example, in the case of the third probability variation big hit, it is shown that the high probability / low base state (second KT state) is immediately controlled regardless of the game state when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even in the case of the third probability variation big hit, if the gaming state at the time of derivation display of the big hit symbol is a low probability / low base state (normal state), it is once a high probability / high base state (first KT The state may be controlled, and thereafter, the transition to the high-probability / low-base state (second KT state) may be performed based on the end of the variable display for a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, when the gaming state at the time of derivation display of the big hit symbol is the high probability / low base state (second KT state), the first probability variation big hit or the second Even if it becomes a probability variation big hit, it is immediately controlled to a high probability / low base state (second KT state). With such a configuration, high probability / low base state (second KT state (small hit RUSH)) It is possible to prevent a sense of disappointment that the job will end. That is, even in the high probability / low base state (second KT state), the variable display of the first special symbol may be executed, the first when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Since the probability of the probability variation jackpot and the second probability variation jackpot is high, it is possible to give the player anxiety that the high probability / low base state (second KT state (small hit RUSH)) may end. There is. Therefore, in this example, when the high-probability / low-base state (second KT state) is in progress, the high-probability / low-base state (second KT state) is immediately controlled even if the first probability variation big hit or the second probability variation big hit occurs. The player is prevented from being given such a feeling of disappointment.

  In this characteristic part 080IW, in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player aims at the left side of the game area and performs a shooting operation (left hit) of the game ball. Therefore, in the normal state, mainly the start winning to the first start winning opening occurs, mainly the variable display of the first special symbol is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 9-24, when the third probability variation big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) is entered after the end of the big hit game. , The high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit (see steps 080IWS2226 to S2227). However, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, only 5% is the third probability variation big hit, and the ratio is low. In addition, when the first probability variation big hit or the second probability variation big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, it shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game, and then The high probability / high base state is maintained until a big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times or 100 times is completed (see steps 080IWS2209 to S2214, S2221-2225). In addition, when the normal big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, after the big hit game ends, it moves to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the next big hit occurs? 50 The low-probability / high-base state is maintained until the end of the variable display of times (see steps 080IWS2205 to S2207).

  In the case where it is after the transition to the KT state (high-probability / high-base state, low-probability / high-base state, high-probability / low-base state), in this feature 080IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. And perform the shooting operation (right hit) of the game ball. Therefore, in the KT state, a start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening, and a variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed.

  As shown in FIG. 9-24, when the second probability variation big hit or the third probability variation big hit occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the high probability / low after the big hit game is finished. The base state (high probability / second KT state) is entered, and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit (see steps 080IWS2221-S2223, S2226-S2227). In addition, when the first probability variation big hit occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), it shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the big hit game ends. However, the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 080IWS2209 to S2211, S2217 to S2219). In addition, when a normal big hit occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), after the big hit game is over, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), The low-probability / high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 080IW080IWS2205 to S2207). Further, in this example, in the high-probability / high-base state (high-probability / first KT state), the high-probability / low-base state is maintained even when the variable display is completed 50 or 100 times without the next big hit. A transition is made to the state (high probability / second KT state) (see steps 080IWS67A to S71A, S67B to S71B).

  As shown in FIG. 9-24, when the third probability variation big hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the high probability / low base state (high probability / Second KT state) and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 080IWS2226 to S2227). In addition, when the first probability variation big hit or the second probability variation big hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the high probability / high base state (high probability / first (1KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 080IWS2209 to S2212, S2215, S2216, S2221 to S2225). Also, when a normal big hit occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game, The low-probability / high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 080IWS2205 to S2207). After the normal big hit occurs and the low probability / high base state is reached, when the next big hit does not occur and the variable display of 50 times is completed, as shown in FIG. Transition to the probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (see steps 080IWS67A to S72A, S67B to S72B).

  As shown in FIG. 9-24, when the first probability variation big hit, the second probability variation big hit, or the third probability variation big hit occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the big hit game After the completion, the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) is entered, and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (steps 080IWS2209 to S2211, S2217, S2221 to S2223, S2226). ~ S2227). In addition, when a normal big hit occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), after the big hit game is over, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), The low-probability / high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 080IWS2205 to S2207).

  In addition, in FIG. 9-24, in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is explained, but the variation of the second special symbol at a low rate. It is possible that the display may be performed. Further, in FIG. 9-24, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed. Further, in FIG. 9-24, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed. Further, in FIG. 9-24, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed.

(Production control main processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 9-25 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the effect control main processing in the characteristic unit 080IW. 9-25, the processing of steps 080IWS201 to S205 is the same as the processing of steps S71 to S75 shown in FIG.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first small symbol process process (step 080IWS206). In this example, by executing the first small symbol process process of step 080IWS206, in the image display device 5, in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbol, the first small symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol. The variable display of is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the second small symbol process process (step 080IWS207). In this example, by executing the second small symbol process process of step 080IWS207, in the image display device 5, apart from the variable display of the decorative symbol, the second small symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol. The variable display of is executed.

  In this example, the small design (first small design, second small design) has a smaller display size than the decorative design, and is less visible than the decorative design. Further, in this example, when the pseudo-relation is executed, the variable display is once again executed after the pseudo-relationship chance symbol is temporarily displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the re-variation is executed once or plural times. However, regarding the variable display of the small symbols, the variable display of the small symbols is continuously executed without the temporary stop display and the re-variation even when the pseudo-relation is executed. In addition, in this example, as will be described later, during the variable display of the special symbol, a shutter effect for displaying a shutter image on the image display device 5 may be executed, and when the shutter effect is performed, the decorative symbol is not displayed. Although it is displayed, the variable display of the small symbols is continuously executed visibly even while the shutter effect is being executed. Also, while the shutter effect is being executed, the decorative design and the hold display are hidden, but regardless of whether the decorative design or the hold display is hidden, the first small design and the second small design The variable display of is executed.

  FIG. 9-26 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a stop symbol of a small symbol (first small symbol, second small symbol). As shown in FIG. 9-26, in this example, when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the symbol combination of "333" (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the first small symbol. It Further, in the case of a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the symbol combination (big hit symbol) of "777" is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbol.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-26, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, a symbol combination of "765" as a stop symbol of the first small symbol (small hit symbol) Is stopped. Further, in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the symbol combination of "765" (small hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbol.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-26, in this example, when the non-reach is lost in the variable display of the first special symbol, the symbol combination of "123" as the stop symbol of the first small symbol (non-reach Off pattern) is stopped and displayed. Further, when the reach is lost in the variable display of the first special symbol, the symbol combination of "323" (reach lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the first small symbol. Further, in the case where the non-reach is lost in the variable display of the second special symbol, the symbol combination of "567" (non-reach miss symbol) is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbol. When the reach is lost in the variable display of the second special symbol, the symbol combination of "767" (reach lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbol.

  Next, the processing of step 080IWS208 is the same as the processing of step S76 shown in FIG.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fourth symbol process process (step 080IWS209). In the present example, the fourth symbol process process of step 080IWS209 is executed, so that in the image display device 5, in addition to the variable display of decorative symbols and small symbols (first small symbol, second small symbol), special symbols The variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of.

  In the present example, when the pseudo-relation is executed, the variable display is once again executed after the pseudo-relationship chance symbol is temporarily displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the re-variation is executed once or plural times. However, regarding the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the small symbols is continuously executed without accompanying the temporary stop display and the re-change even when the pseudo-relation is executed. In addition, in this example, as will be described later, during the variable display of the special symbol, a shutter effect for displaying a shutter image on the image display device 5 may be executed, and when the shutter effect is performed, the decorative symbol is not displayed. Although it is displayed, the variable display of the fourth symbol is continuously executed visibly even while the shutter effect is being executed. Also, while the shutter effect is being executed, the decorative design and the hold display are hidden, but the variable display of the fourth design is executed regardless of whether the decorative design or the hold display is hidden. It

  Next, the process of step 080IWS210 is the same as the process of step S77 shown in FIG.

(Command analysis process)
9-27 to 9-30 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step 080IWS205). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 080IWS611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 080IWS612). When read, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 080IWS613). The reason why +2 is performed is that two bytes (one command) are read.

  If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 080IWS614), the effect control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 080IWS615).

  If the received effect control command is the variation pattern command (step 080IWS616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 080IWS617). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 080IWS618).

  If the received effect control command is the display result designation command (step 080IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 080IWS620). ).

  If the received production control command is any symbol confirmation designation command (first symbol confirmation designation command, second symbol confirmation designation command, first forced symbol confirmation designation command, second forced symbol confirmation designation command) (step 080IWS621) ), The effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag according to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 080IWS622). For example, when the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first compulsory confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second forced confirmation command reception flag is set.

  If the received effect control command is a big hit start designation command (step 080IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 080IWS624). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a big hit start designation command reception flag (step 080IWS625).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is a value according to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 080IWS626). In this example, as will be described later, when the right-handing notification is not being made (for example, during the low probability / low base state (normal state)), the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. Then, when the right-handing notification is in progress (for example, in the KT state), the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, even if the right-handed notification is in progress, or even when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, when the right-handed notification is not performed, a big hit In the case of (hereinafter, referred to as irregular big hit), the variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed. If the value of the production control process flag is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (Y in step 080IWS626), that is, if it is not an irregular big hit, the process directly proceeds to step 080IWS611.

  If the value of the effect control process flag is not a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (N in step 080IWS626), it is the case of an irregular big hit, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed. In this case, as will be described later, since the shutter effect is being executed in the case of an irregular big hit, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to end the shutter effect (step 080IWS627).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the big hit (step 080IWS628). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value to the process timer (step 080IWS629), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), control of the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, various lamps as the production component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the production component) is executed (step 080IWS630).

  After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the big hit medium effect process (step S176) (step 080IWS631).

  In this example, in the case of a regular big hit that is not irregular, control is performed to start displaying the number of prize balls displayed at the start of the big hit game (see steps 080IWS9711 and S9712), but in the case of an irregular big hit Similarly, the display of the number of prize balls may be started.

  If the received effect control command is the big hit end designation command (step 080IWS632), the effect control CPU 120 performs control for ending the display of right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 080IWS633). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a big hit end designation command reception flag (step 080IWS634).

  In this example, the right hit display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the big hit game by executing the processing of steps 080IWS624 and S633.

  If the received production control command is the small hit start designation command (step 080IWS635), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step 080IWS636).

  If the received production control command is a small hit end designation command (step 080IWS637), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit end designation command reception flag (step 080IWS638).

  If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 080IWS639), the effect control CPU 120 sets a right-handed lighting flag indicating that right-handling notification is being performed (step 063IWS640), and right. Control for starting lighting of the hitting notification LED 37 is performed (step 080IWS641). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control performs control to replace the decorative design displayed on the image display device 5 with the same design as the second small design and display it (step 080IWS642).

  If the received effect control command is the right-handed lighting end designation command (step 080IWS643), the effect control CPU 120 resets the right-handed lighting flag (step 063IWS644), and the effect control CPU 120 causes the right-handing notification LED 37. The control for ending the lighting is performed (step 080IWS645).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big hit symbol (in this example, a combination of symbols “333”) is stopped and displayed as the first small symbol on the image display device 5 ( Step 080IWS646). If the big hit symbol is not stopped and displayed as the first small symbol, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to replace the decorative symbol displayed on the image display device 5 with the same symbol as the first small symbol and display it. Perform (step 080IWS647). If the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the first small symbol, the effect control CPU 120 initially outputs the decorative symbol displayed on the image display device 5 (in this example, the symbol “135” is displayed). The display is replaced by the combination (step 080IWS648).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 resets the prize ball counter for counting the prize balls (step 080IWS649).

  In this example, by executing the processing of step 080IWS649, the value of the prize ball number counter is reset at the timing of receiving the right hitting lighting end designation command and starting the left hitting operation. Therefore, in this example, when the right-handed lighting start designation command is first received and the right-handed operation is started, the value of the prize ball number counter is started, and the right-handed lighting end designation command is received and left-handed. The counting of the value of the prize ball number counter is ended at the timing of starting the operation.

  If the received production control command is a low-accuracy / non-KT background designating command (step 080IWS650), the production control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 to a background image (for example, a background image corresponding to the low probability / non-KT state). Display control is performed with a blue background image) (step 080IWS651). Further, the effect control CPU 120, if set, resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state (step 080IWS652).

  If the received production control command is a low-accuracy / first KT background designating command (step 080IWS653), the production control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 to a low probability / background image corresponding to the first KT state (for example, The display is controlled with a green background image) (step 080IWS654). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the first KT state flag (step 080IWS655) and, if set, the high-probability state flag indicating the high-probability state, and the second KT state indicating the second KT state. The 2KT status flag is reset (step 080IWS656).

  If the received production control command is the high-accuracy / first KT background designating command (step 080IWS657), the production control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 to a high probability / background image corresponding to the first KT state (for example, Display control is performed with a yellow background image) (step 080IWS658). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high-probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 080IWS659), and resets the second KT state flag if set (step 080IWS660).

  If the received effect control command is the high-accuracy / second KT background designation command (step 080IWS661), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 to the background image corresponding to the high probability / second KT state (for example, Display control is performed with a red background image) (step 080IWS662). Moreover, the production control CPU 120 sets the high-probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 080IWS663), and resets the first KT state flag if set (step 080IWS664).

  If the received effect control command is the special winning opening award designation command (step 080IWS665), the effect control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the prize ball counter (step 080IWS666). Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs control for updating the award ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the award ball number counter after the addition (step 080IWS667).

  If the received effect control command is the special winning award winning designation command (step 080IWS668), it is confirmed whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 080IWS669). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is the second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the prize ball number counter (step 080IWS670). Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs control for updating the award ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the award ball number counter after the addition (step 080IWS671).

  By executing the processing of steps 080IWS668 to S671, in the present example, the special winning opening is won in the small hitting gaming state in the second KT state, except when the winning in the big winning opening is generated during the big hitting game. Even when occurs, the prize ball count display is updated.

  If the received effect control command is any other command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of storing the received effect control command or setting a flag according to the received effect control command (step 080IWS672). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 080IWS611.

(Variable display start wait processing)
FIG. 9-31 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command is received (step 080IWS811). Whether or not the fluctuation pattern command is received is determined by, for example, in the command analysis process (step 080IWS205), when the fluctuation pattern command is received, a fluctuation pattern command reception flag indicating that the fluctuation pattern command is received is set. In step 080IWS811, it is only necessary to confirm whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set.

  If the variation pattern command is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the right hitting lighting flag is set (step 080IWS812). If the right hit lighting flag is not set (that is, if the right hit notification is not being made and the left hit operation is being performed), the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the first special symbol. It is confirmed whether or not this is the case (step 080IWS813). Whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation patterns # 01 to # 12. It can be determined by confirming that. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed), the process is ended as it is. If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed, the process proceeds to step 080IWS815.

  If the right hitting lighting flag is set (that is, if the right hitting notification is in progress and the right hitting operation is being performed), the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the second special symbol. It is confirmed whether or not this is the case (step 080IWS814). Whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns # 01 to # 34. It can be determined by confirming that. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol is executed (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed), the process is ended as it is. If the variable display of the second special symbol is to be executed, the process proceeds to step 080IWS815.

  By executing the processing of steps 080IWS812 to S814, in this characteristic part 080IW, when the left-handed operation is being performed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of the first special symbol. Is executed, and when the right-handing operation is being performed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. In other words, even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the right-handing operation is being performed, and even when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the left-handing operation is being performed. In this case, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the shutter effect is being executed (step 080IWS815). Whether or not the shutter effect is being executed is determined by, for example, setting a flag indicating that the shutter effect is being executed when the shutter effect is started in step 080IWS819 of the variable display start waiting process, and then step 080IWS815. Then, it suffices to confirm whether or not the flag is set.

  If the shutter effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to end the shutter effect (step 080IWS816). Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to restart the display of the decorative pattern and the hold display on the image display device 5 (step 080IWS817).

  By executing the processing of steps 080IWS815 to S817, in the present example, in the case where the shutter effect is executed in the variation display of the decorative symbol of the out variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, the shutter effect is performed in the middle. If the variable display of the 2 special symbols is not started, after finishing the variable display of the first special symbol, the shutter effect is finished at the timing when the variable display of the next decorative symbol is started, and the decorative symbol and the hold display are changed. Display is resumed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed in the variation display of the decorative symbol of the out variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, if the variation display of the first special symbol is not started in the middle, the second After ending the variable display of the special symbol, the shutter effect is ended at the timing when the next variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the display of the decorative symbol and the hold display is restarted.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a variation pattern for shutter effect (step 080IWS818). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not any of the second variation patterns # 14 to # 16 is designated. If the variation pattern is for the shutter effect, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start the shutter effect on the image display device 5 (step 080IWS819). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control performs control to erase the decorative pattern and the hold display displayed on the image display device 5 (step 080IWS820).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 080IWS821).

  If it is not the case that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in step 080IWS814, that is, if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, but when the right-handing notification is being issued, if it is an irregular big hit The shutter effect starting process 1 for starting the shutter effect is executed (step 080IWS822). In this example, in the case of an irregular big hit, it is a case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol, but a case of performing a right-handed notification and a variable display of the second special symbol. There is a case where is not in the right-handed notification, the shutter effect start processing 1 is a case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, but the control to start the shutter effect when the right-handed notification is being issued. This is the process to be performed.

  Further, in this example, when the variable display of the 50th variation of the low probability / high base state (first KT state) is finished, the low probability / low base state (normal state) is controlled. Since it is in the high base state (first KT state), the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the variable display of the 50th variation, and the low probability / low base state (normal state) is controlled. However, the variable display of the first special symbol may be irregularly executed as the variable display of the 50th variation, and the low probability / low base state (normal state) may be controlled. In this case, the variable display of the decorative symbol may be changed. It will appear to be controlled to a low probability / low base state (normal state) without being executed. In the present example, even when such irregular 50th variation display is executed, the shutter effect is started by executing the shutter effect start process 1.

  When it is not the case that the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in step 080IWS813, that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, but when the right-handed notification is not being issued, in the case of an irregular big hit A shutter effect start process 2 that is a process for starting the shutter effect is executed (step 080IWS832). It should be noted that the shutter effect start process 2 is a process of performing a control to start the shutter effect when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner but is not in the right-handing notification.

  FIG. 9-32 (A) is a flowchart showing the shutter effect start process 1 (step 080IWS822). In the shutter effect start process 1, first, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command is the first variation pattern for big hit (first variation pattern # 05, # 06, # 09, # 12). Is checked (step 080IWS501). If it is the first variation pattern for big hits (that is, if it is irregular big hits), the CPU 120 for effect control checks whether or not the current game state is the low probability / high base state (step). 080IWS502). Note that the low-probability / high-base state can be determined by, for example, checking whether the high-probability state flag is off and only the first KT state flag is set (step 080IWS655). reference). In the low probability / high base state, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start the normal / time saving shutter effect in the image display device 5 (step 080IWS503). It should be noted that the decorative design and the hold display may be erased while the normal / shortened shutter effect is being executed.

  If it is not the low probability / high base state, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current game state is the high probability / high base state (step 080IWS504). Whether or not the high probability / high base state can be determined by, for example, checking whether or not the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag are set (see step 080IWS659). If it is the high probability / high base state, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start the shutter effect for the high probability / high base state in the image display device 5 (step 080IWS505). It should be noted that during execution of the shutter effect for the high probability / high base state, the decorative design and the hold display may be erased.

  If it is not the high probability / high base state, it means that the current game state is the high probability / low base state. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start the shutter effect for the small hit RUSH on the image display device 5 (step 080IWS506). The decorative design and the hold display may be erased during the execution of the shutter effect for the small hit RUSH.

  If it is not the first variation pattern for big hit, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation patterns indicated by the received variation pattern command are the first variation patterns # 7 and # 8 (step 080IWS507). If it is the first variation pattern # 7, # 8 (that is, if the variation display of the 50th variation in the low probability / high base state is executed), the effect control CPU 120 ends the time saving in the image display device 5. Control is performed to start time-use shutter effects (step 080IWS508). The decorative design and the hold display may be erased during the execution of the shutter effect for the time saving end.

  FIG. 9-32 (B) is a flowchart showing the shutter effect start process 2 (step 080IWS823). In the shutter effect start process 2, the effect control CPU 120 first determines that the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command is the second variation pattern for the big hit (first variation pattern # 03, # 06, # 13, # 16, # 21, # 28, # 34) is checked (step 080IWS511). If it is the second variation pattern for big hits (that is, if it is irregular big hits), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start the shutter effect for normal / time saving on the image display device 5 (step 080IWS512). ). It should be noted that the decorative design and the hold display may be erased while the normal / shortened shutter effect is being executed.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 9-33 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the right hitting lighting flag is set (step 080IWS920). If the right hitting lighting flag is not set (that is, if the right hitting notification is not being made and the left hitting operation is being performed), the effect control CPU 120 determines the first small as the decorative symbol stop symbol. The combination of the same symbols as the stop symbol of the first small symbol determined in the symbol process process (step 080IWS206) is determined (step 080IWS921). If the right-handing lighting flag is set (that is, if the right-handing notification is in progress and the right-handing operation is being performed), the effect control CPU 120 uses the second small as the decorative design stop design. The combination of the same symbols as the stop symbol of the second small symbol determined in the symbol process process (step 080IWS207) is determined (step 080IWS922).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current variation display is out of order (step 080IWS923). It should be noted that whether or not the variable display this time is out of order is determined by, for example, checking whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. Can be determined by. If it is not a deviation variation, the process directly proceeds to step 080IWS927. If it is a deviation variation (Y in step 080IWS923), the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting value suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence and type of the setting value suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value. (Step 080IWS924).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 080IWS925). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, it is not the second KT state), the process directly proceeds to step 080IWS927. If the second KT state flag is set (Y in step 080IWS925), that is, if it is the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 suggests that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue. A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence and type of the continuation suggestion effect is executed (step 080IWS926).

  Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the variation pattern of the decorative pattern to be used and the set value suggestion effect or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, based on the change pattern indicated by the received change pattern command. , A process table corresponding to the set value suggestion effect or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is selected (step 080IWS927).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer set value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 080IWS927 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 080IWS928). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step 080IWS929). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14 in order to control the turning on / off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  However, in this example, when the shutter effect is executed, since the decorative design is not displayed, the variable display of the decorative design is not executed (small design (first small design, second small design), The variable display of the fourth symbol is executed).

  When it is determined to execute the set value suggestion effect, the step 080IWS929 and the variable display effect process (step S172) are executed in accordance with the process table including the set value suggestion effect selected in step 080IWS927, so that the decoration is performed. The set value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the symbols (during the deviation).

  When it is determined to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, step 080IWS929 and the variable display during effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in step 080IWS927. As a result, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variation display of the decorative pattern (during the variation of the deviation in the second KT state).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time in the decorative symbol variation time timer to start the decorative symbol variation time timer (step 080IWS930). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the variable display effect effect process (step S172) (step 080IWS931).

(Direction processing during variable display)
9-34 and FIG. 9-35 are flowcharts showing the effect display during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process processing. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 080IWS8101), and also subtracts 1 from the value of the decorative pattern variation time timer (step 080IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 080IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 080IWS8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 080IWS8105).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the right hitting lighting flag is set (step 080IWS8106). If the right striking lighting flag is not set (that is, if the right striking is not in progress and the left striking operation is being performed), the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation designating command. Whether or not (for example, whether or not the first confirmation command reception flag is set) is confirmed (step 080IWS8107). If the first symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the special figure winning waiting process (step S173) (step 080IWS8110).

  If the first symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command (for example, whether or not the first compulsory confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 080IWS8108). If the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 080IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with a falling symbol (step 080IWS8109). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 080IWS8110).

  If the right hitting lighting flag is set in step 080IWS8106 (that is, if the right hitting notification is being made and the right hitting operation is being performed), the effect control CPU 120 issues the second symbol confirmation designating command. It is confirmed whether or not it has been received (for example, whether or not the second confirmation command reception flag is set) (step 080IWS8111). If the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 080IWS8114).

  If the second symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the second forced symbol confirmation designation command (for example, whether or not the second forced confirmation command reception flag is set). Is confirmed (step 080IWS8112). If the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 080IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with a falling symbol (step 080IWS8113). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per-waiting process (step S173) (step 080IWS8114).

  If the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command has not been received in step 080IWS8108, or if the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command has not been received in step 080IWS8112, the effect control CPU 120 is executing the shutter effect. It is confirmed whether or not (step 080IWS8115). Whether or not the shutter effect is being executed is determined by, for example, setting a flag indicating that the shutter effect is being executed when the shutter effect is started in step 080IWS819 of the variable display start waiting process, and then step 080IWS8115. Then, it suffices to confirm whether or not the flag is set.

  If the shutter effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display being executed is a big hit fluctuation (step 080IWS8116). If it is not a big hit variation (that is, if it is an outlying variation or a small hit variation), the effect control CPU 120 executes the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed in correspondence with the variation display of the first special symbol. Is confirmed (step 080IWS8117). Whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, for example, whether or not the right-handed lighting flag is set is confirmed. It can be determined by doing.

  If the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol is started. (Step 080IWS8118). Whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol is started can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not a variation pattern command designating the second variation patterns # 01 to # 34 is received. If the variable display of the second special symbol is not started, the process proceeds to step 080IWS8122 as it is.

  If the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed is not executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, that is, the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed corresponds to the variable display of the second special symbol. If it is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is started (step 080IWS8119). Whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is started can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not a variation pattern command designating the first variation patterns # 01 to # 12 is received. If the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, the process proceeds to step 080IWS8122 as it is.

  The variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is started (Y in step 080IWS8118), or is being executed. The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is started (Y in step 080IWS8119), the CPU 120 for effect control Then, the image display device 5 is controlled to end the shutter effect (step 080IWS8120). Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to restart the display of the decorative pattern and the hold display on the image display device 5 (step 080IWS8121).

  By executing the processing of step 080IWS8115 to S8121, in the present example, when the shutter effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative symbol of the out variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, when the shutter effect is performed, the first When the variable display of the two special symbols is started, the shutter effect is ended at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, and the display of the decorative symbol and the hold display is restarted. Further, when the shutter effect is executed in the variation display of the decorative symbol of the out variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started in the middle, The shutter effect is ended at the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, and the display of the decorative symbol and the hold display is restarted.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out (step 080IWS8122). If the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 switches to process data for standby effect (step 080IWS8123). Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 080IWS8124).

  In this example, as already described, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit, the variation display of the first special symbol that is a deviant or small hit, the probability big hit is being executed. In, during the small hit game, the update of the first variation time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Also, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit, if the variation display of the second special symbol that is a deviation or a small hit, the probability variation big hit is being executed, during the small hit game. The update of the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Without receiving any symbol confirmation designation command, the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out in step 080IWS8122, which means that the update of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is interrupted in this way. It is a case where the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, the process of steps 080IWS8123 and S8124 is executed to switch to the standby effect, and then the update of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is restarted, and finally one special The standby effect is continued until the variable display of the symbols or the second special symbols is completed. The "standby effect" is, for example, an effect in which the left, right, and right decorative patterns on the image display device 5 are temporarily stopped in a swinging or slightly varying state.

  In this example, the image display device 5 also executes the variable display of the small symbols (first small symbol, second small symbol) and the fourth symbol, but of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer. When the update is suspended and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed, these small symbols (first small symbol, second small symbol) and the variable display of the fourth symbol are also displayed. It will be executed continuously. Then, the update of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is restarted, and when the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, these small symbols (first small symbol, The second small symbol) and the variable display of the fourth symbol are also stopped and displayed.

(Waiting process for special maps)
FIG. 9-36 and FIG. 9-37 are flowcharts showing the special figure per wait process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 080IWS9701). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step 080IWS9707. In this characteristic part 080IW, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 080IWS9706. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when executing the big hit mid effect. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the stage during the jackpot has not yet been performed. Without executing, the process moves to step 080IWS9707.

  If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set. (Step 080IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step 080IWS9719. In this characteristic part 080IW, when the small hitting design is displayed as the stop design of the decorative design, the stop design display flag 2 is set in step 080IWS9718. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when executing the effect during the small hit. Therefore, if the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, it means that the small hit symbol has been fixedly displayed, but the effect during the small hit has not yet been executed, so the stop symbol of the decorative symbol of step 080IWS9704 is displayed. The process moves to step 080IWS9719 without executing the process.

  If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the shutter effect is being executed (step 080IWS9703). Whether or not the shutter effect is being executed is determined by, for example, setting a flag indicating that the shutter effect is being executed when the shutter effect is started in step 080IWS819 of the variable display start waiting process, and then step 080IWS9703. Then, it suffices to confirm whether or not the flag is set. If the shutter effect is being executed, the process directly proceeds to step 080IWS9705. That is, in this example, since the decorative design is controlled so as not to be displayed during the execution of the shutter effect, the control is performed so as not to perform the process of finalizing the stop design of the decorative design in step 080IWS9704.

  If the shutter effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to confirm and display the stop symbol (outlier symbol, large hit symbol, small hit symbol) of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. Perform (step 080IWS9704). It should be noted that when the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command or the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received and the process of replacing with a deviation symbol is executed in steps 080IWS8109 and S8113, in step 080IWS9704, the effect control CPU 120, the deviation symbol The control to confirm is displayed.

  When the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 080IWS9704 (Y in step 080IWS9705), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 080IWS9706).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big hit start designation command has been received (step 080IWS9707). When the big hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 080IWS9708).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the shutter effect is being executed (step 080IWS9709). Whether or not the shutter effect is being executed is determined by, for example, setting a flag indicating that the shutter effect is being executed when the shutter effect is started in step 080IWS819 of the variable display start waiting process, and then step 080IWS9709. Then, it suffices to confirm whether or not the flag is set. If the shutter effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to end the shutter effect (step 080IWS9710). When the shutter effect is finished in step 080IWS9710, after that, the big hit game state is controlled, and when the big display game is finished and the variable display of the decorative design is started on the image display device 5, the display of the decorative design and the hold display is displayed. It will be restarted.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the award ball number display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 080IWS9711). If the prize ball number display is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the prize ball number display on the image display device 5 based on the current value of the prize ball number counter (step 080IWS9712). .

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the big hit (step 080IWS9713). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 080IWS9714), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), control of the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, various lamps as the production component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the production component) is executed (step 080IWS9715).

  After that, the CPU 120 for effect control updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the effect process during big hit (step S176) (step 080IWS9716).

  If the big hit symbol is not definitely displayed in the process of step 080IWS9704 (N in step 080IWS9705), if the small hit symbol is definitely displayed in the process of step 080IWS9704 (Y in step 080IWS9717), the CPU 120 for effect control stops. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 080IWS9718).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 080IWS9719). When the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 080IWS9720).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the small hit (step 080IWS9721). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 080IWS9722), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), control of the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, various lamps as the production component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the production component) is executed (step 080IWS9723).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during small hit (step S174) (step 080IWS9724).

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step 080IWS9704 (that is, when the deviating symbol is displayed) (N in step 080IWS9705 and N in step 080IWS9717), the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect control. The value of the process flag is updated to a value according to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 080IWS9725).

(Direction processing during big hit)
FIG. 9-38 is a flowchart showing the big hit mid-sized effect process (step S176) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8. In the big hit mid-stage effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not any big hit end designation command is received (for example, whether or not any big hit end designation command reception flag is set). (Step 080IWS2901). If one of the jackpot end designation commands is received, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 080IWS2902), and the effect device (the image display device 5, the speaker 8L, and the speaker 8L, according to the content of the process data n). 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc. are controlled (step 080IWS2903).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out (step 080IWS2904), and if the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 080IWS2905). That is, the process data is switched to the next set process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) in the process table. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 080IWS2906).

  If any of the big hit end designation command is received (Y in step 080IWS2901), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not to end the big hit game based on the third probability variation big hit (step 080IWS2907). .. If the big hit game based on the third probability variation big hit is to be finished, the process moves to step 080IWS2912. If it is not the time to end the big hit game based on the third probability variation big hit, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether it is the time to end the big hit game based on the second probability variation big hit (step 080IWS2908). If the big hit game based on the second probability variation big hit is to be finished, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the high probability state flag is set (step 080IWS2909). If the high-probability state flag is set (that is, high-probability / high-base state or high-probability / low-base state), the process moves to step 080IWS2912. Even if the big hit game based on the second probability variation big hit is not finished, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether it is the time to finish the big hit game based on the first probability variation big hit (step 080IWS2910). If the big hit game based on the first probability variation big hit is to be finished, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 080IWS2911). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, high probability / low base state (second KT state)), the process moves to step 080IWS2912.

  When the jackpot game based on the third probability variation jackpot is finished (Y in step 080IWS2907), the high-probability state flag is set (Y in step 080IWS2909), or the second KT state flag is set (step 080IWS2911). Y), that is, when the second big hit game is over and the second KT state is controlled, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start the shutter effect on the image display device 5 (step 080IWS2912). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control performs control to erase the decorative pattern and the hold display displayed on the image display device 5 (step 080IWS2913).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the ending effect (step 080IWS2914). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value to the process timer (step 080IWS2915), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), control of the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the game effect lamp 9 as the production component, and the speakers 8L, 8R as the production component) is executed (step 080IWS2916). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period of the ending effect (step 080IWS2917). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 also resets the set jackpot end designation command reception flag.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the ending effect process (step 080IWS2918), and ends the big hit medium effect process.

(Ending production process)
9-39 is a flowchart showing the ending effect process (step S177) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 080IWS951). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 080IWS952).

  When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 080IWS952), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 080IWS953), and the effect device (image display device 5 according to the content of the process data n). , Game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) are executed (step 080IWS954). For example, an effect of displaying that the jackpot is over or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

  And CPU120 for production control confirms whether the process timer has timed out (step 080IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 080IWS956). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 080IWS957).

  If the production period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 080IWS952), the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not to end the big hit game based on the third probability variation big hit (step 080IWS958). If the big hit game based on the third probability variation big hit is to be finished, the process moves to step 080IWS964. If it is not the time to end the big hit game based on the third probability variation big hit, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether it is the case to end the big hit game based on the second probability variation big hit (step 080IWS959). If the big hit game based on the second probability variation big hit is to be finished, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the high probability state flag is set (step 080IWS960). If the high probability state flag is set (that is, high probability / high base state or high probability / low base state), the process proceeds to step 080IWS964. Even if the big hit game based on the second probability variation big hit is not finished, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether it is the time to finish the big hit game based on the first probability variation big hit (step 080IWS961). If the big hit game based on the first probability variation big hit is to be finished, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 080IWS962). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, high probability / low base state (second KT state)), the process proceeds to step 080IWS964.

  If it is not the time to end the big hit game based on the first probability variation big hit (N in step 080IWS961), or if the second KT state flag is not set (N in step 080IWS962), that is, after the end of this big hit game. When not controlled to the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to erase the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 (step 0645IWS963). However, in this case, the prize ball number display is only erased, and the prize ball number counter is not reset, so the game state shifts to a low probability / low base state (normal state) and a right-handing operation is performed. The value of the prize ball number counter is maintained until the end of.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the shutter effect is being executed (step 080IWS964). Whether or not the shutter effect is being executed is determined by, for example, setting a flag indicating that the shutter effect is being executed when the shutter effect is started in step 080IWS819 of the variable display start waiting process, and then step 080IWS964. Then, it suffices to confirm whether or not the flag is set. If the shutter effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to end the shutter effect (step 080IWS965). When the shutter effect is finished in step 080IWS965, the display of the decorative design and the hold display is restarted when the variable display of the decorative design is started on the image display device 5 thereafter.

  After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 080IWS966).

(Direction example)
Next, a description will be given of a performance mode of a performance executed in the present characteristic unit 080IW. First, the display mode of the right-handed notification will be described. FIG. 9-40 is an explanatory diagram for describing a display mode of right-handed notification. In this example, regardless of whether it is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol or whether it is a big hit by executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of a big hit game As shown in FIG. 9-40 (1), the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on by the game controlling microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) (see steps 080IWS2022A and S2022B). Further, based on the reception of the right-handing lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (1), the right-handling notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 (steps 080IWS2023A, S2023B, S641). reference). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (1), the effect control CPU 120 displays the right-handed display 080IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see step 080IWS624).

  Further, in this example, when the small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, during the small hit game, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (2), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically The right-handed indicator 26 is turned on by the CPU 103) (see step 080IWS2029B). Further, based on the reception of the right-handing lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (2), the right-handling notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 (see steps 080IWS2030B and S641). .. However, unlike during the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (2), the right hit display 080IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

  On the other hand, in the present example, when the small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. The hitting notification LED 37 is not turned on, and the right hitting display 080IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

  Next, an effect mode of the shutter effect will be described. FIG. 9-41 is an explanatory diagram for describing an effect mode of shutter effect. Note that, in FIG. 9-41, the effect screens transition in the order of (T1) (T2) (T3). In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-41, on the display screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol display area 080IW010 for displaying a left-middle-right decorative symbol and a left-middle-right first small symbol are displayed. A first small symbol display area 080IW011 and a second small symbol display area 080IW012 for displaying the second middle and left small symbols are provided. Further, on the display screen of the image display device 5, a fourth symbol display area 080IW013 for displaying the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and a fourth symbol display for displaying the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. Area 080IW014 is provided. In addition, on the display screen of the image display device 5, a first hold storage display area 080IW015 for displaying a first hold display corresponding to the first hold storage and a second hold display for displaying the second hold storage are displayed. A two-hold storage display area 080IW016 is provided.

  In addition, in this example, the case where the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display areas 080IW013, 014 provided on the display screen of the image display device 5 is shown, but it is limited to such a mode. Absent. For example, a light emitting element such as an LED provided separately from the image display device 5 may be blinked, turned on or off to perform light emission display, and variable display of the fourth symbol may be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 9-41 (T1), in the low probability / high base state (first KT state), when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the second small symbol display area 080IW012 is correspondingly started. In the left middle right variation display of the second small symbol is started, and in the decorative symbol display area 080IW010 variation display of the left middle right decorative symbol is started, and in the fourth symbol display area 080IW014 variable display of the fourth symbol Is started. Then, when the variable time ends, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T2), the stop symbol of the second small symbol is fixedly displayed in the second small symbol display area 080IW012, and the decorative symbol is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 080IW010. The stop symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is confirmed and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 080IW014. In FIG. 9-41 (T2), the deviation symbol is definitely displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbol, the decorative symbol, and the fourth symbol.

  Next, it is assumed that the variation display of the second special symbol is started as the final variation (50th variation) of the low probability / high base state (first KT state). In this case, based on the reception of the variation pattern command designating the variation pattern including the shutter effect, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T3), the image display device 5 displays the characters "big hit preparing". The shutter effect image 080IW017 including is displayed so as to be closed from the left and right, whereby the shutter effect is started (see step 080IWS819). In this example, it is assumed that the second variation pattern # 16 is determined based on the fact that the variation display of the second special symbol, which is the jackpot variation as the final variation, is started.

  Further, when the shutter effect is started, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T3), the left-middle-right decorative design in the decorative design display region 080IW010 is erased, and the first reserved storage display region 080IW015 and the second reserved storage region are displayed. The hold display displayed in the hold storage display area 080IW016 is erased (see step 080IWS820). However, even if the decorative effect is erased when the shutter effect is started, the display of the second small symbol in the second small symbol display area 080IW012 is continued, and as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T3), the second small symbol display In the area 080IW012, the variable display of the second small symbol on the left middle right is started. Further, the display of the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display area 080IW014 is continued, and as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T3), the variable display of the fourth symbol is started in the fourth symbol display area 080IW014.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T4), the shutter effect is continuously executed during the variable display of the second small symbol and the fourth symbol. Then, when the variation time ends, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T5), the stop symbol of the second small symbol is fixedly displayed in the second small symbol display area 080IW012, and the fourth symbol display area 080IW014 is displayed. The stop symbols of the four symbols are confirmed and displayed. In addition, in FIG. 9-41 (T5), the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbol and the fourth symbol.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T5), in the image display device 5, a right-handed image 080IW018 is displayed superimposed on the shutter effect image 080IW017 so as to urge a right-handed operation in which a shooting operation is aimed at the right side of the game area. It Further, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T5), in the image display device 5, a gate passage promotion image 080IW019 that prompts passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is displayed superimposed on the right-handed image 080IW018.

  Next, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is controlled to the big hit game state, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T6), the right-handed image 080IW018 and the gate passage promotion image 080IW019 are displayed on the image display device 5. The shutter effect is ended by moving to the left and right from the center to be hidden (see step 080IWS9710). Then, when the shutter effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (T7), a character display such as “big hit” and a round number display are displayed, and a prize ball number display 080IW020 is displayed. Therefore, an effect such that the big hit game is started immediately after the shutter effect is finished is executed. Then, after that, when the jackpot game is finished and the variable display of the next decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design and the hold display is restarted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 9-41, the final variation (50th variation) in the low-probability / high-base state (first KT state) is a big hit variation, but the final variation is a deviation variation or a small hit. Even when there is fluctuation, the shutter effect is executed in the same manner as in (T3) and (T4) in FIG. 9-41. Then, after the variable time is ended, the shutter effect is ended and the display of the decorative design and the hold display is restarted when the next variable display of the decorative design is started (see step 080IWS816, S817). However, when the shutter effect is executed in the variation display of the decorative symbol of the out variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, when the variation display of the second special symbol is started in the middle, The shutter effect is ended at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, and the display of the decorative symbol and the hold display is restarted. Further, when the shutter effect is executed in the variation display of the decorative symbol of the out variation or the small hit variation corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started in the middle, The shutter effect is ended at the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, and the display of the decorative symbol and the hold display is restarted (see steps 080IWS8115 to S8121).

  Next, a mode of switching the display of the decorative pattern will be described. FIG. 9-42 is an explanatory diagram for describing the manner of switching the display of the decorative pattern. Although not shown in FIG. 9-42, the image display device 5 is provided with a fourth symbol display area for displaying the fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol is also displayed (FIG. 9). 9-41).

  In this example, the gaming state is controlled to a low probability / low base state (normal state), and during the period in which the left-handed operation is performed, the left middle right in the decorative symbol display area 080IW010 corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. The decorative pattern of is displayed. Therefore, when the gaming state is a low probability / low base state (normal state) and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed to be a big hit, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the left column of FIG. 9-42 (1) is displayed. As shown, in the first small symbol display area 080IW011, a big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed as a stop symbol of the first small symbol, and in the decorative symbol display area 080IW010, as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. The same big hit design as one small design is confirmed and displayed. After that, when the big hit game is started, the right hitting operation is performed, so that the decorative symbol display area 080IW010 is switched to a display corresponding to the second special symbol (see step 080IWS642), and the big hit game is ended. Then, for example, when the state shifts to the second KT state, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-42 (1), the decorative symbol display area 080IW010 corresponds to the second special symbol as the second small symbol as the decorative symbol. The same symbol as the second small symbol displayed in the symbol display area 080IW012 is displayed.

  In this example, when the big hit game is finished and the second KT state is controlled, the shutter effect is executed (see step 080IWS2912). In this case, for example, in the image display device 5, a shutter in which a character display such as "small hit RUSH preparing" is displayed instead of the character display "preparing big hit" in (T3) and (T4) of FIGS. 9-41. It suffices to execute an effect that closes.

  Further, the left column of FIG. 9-42 (2) shows the display state of the decorative symbol just before the end of the final change (50th change) in the low probability / high base state. In this case, since the right-handed operation is performed, as shown in the left column of FIG. 9-42 (2), the decorative symbol display area 080IW010 is the second as a decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. The same symbols as the second small symbols displayed in the small symbol display area 080IW012 are displayed. Then, when the final change (50th change) is finished and the low probability / low base state (normal state) is entered, the state shifts to a state where a left-handed operation is performed, so the decorative symbol display area 080IW010 has the first special The state is changed to a state in which the same symbol as the first small symbol displayed in the first small symbol display area 080IW011 as a decorative symbol is displayed corresponding to the symbol (see step 080IWS647).

  However, as shown in FIG. 9-42 (2), when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol executed last time by chance, it is displayed in the first small symbol display area 080IW011. The first small symbol may remain the big hit symbol. In such a case, if the same design as the decorative design first small design is switched as it is, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that a big hit has occurred, even though the big hit has not occurred. . Therefore, in this example, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-42 (2), when the final fluctuation (50th fluctuation) in the low-probability / high-base state is finished, the big hit symbol is displayed as the first small symbol. If it is in a state that is, is not configured to switch the decorative design to the same design as the first small design, it is configured to switch to the initial appearance (in this example, the combination of the design of "135") (See step 080IWS648).

  Further, the left column of FIG. 9-42 (3) is controlled to a high probability state or a high base state, and when the right hitting operation is performed, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. The case of a big hit is shown. In this case, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in the left column of FIG. 9-42 (3), the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed as the stop symbol of the second small symbol in the second small symbol display area 080IW012. In the decorative symbol display area 080IW010, the same big hit symbol as the second small symbol is fixedly displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. After that, since the state in which the right-handed operation is performed continues, the state in which the same symbol as the second small symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol is continued, and when the jackpot game is finished, (9-42 ( As shown in the right column of 3), the same symbol as the second small symbol displayed in the second small symbol display region 080IW012 as a decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol continues in the decorative symbol display region 080IW010. Is displayed.

  In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-42, the small symbol on the sub symbol side of the first small symbol and the second small symbol is always displayed, but in such a mode I can't stop. For example, the small symbol on the sub symbol side of the first small symbol and the second small symbol need not always be displayed, and may be configured to be displayed only during the symbol fixing period of the sub symbol. If so configured, during the fluctuation of the main symbol of the first small symbol and the second small symbol, by omitting the display of extra information, the effect display corresponding to the main symbol (reach effect, etc.) It is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the.

  In this example, both the decorative design and the small design (first small design, second small design) start the variable display based on the reception of the variable pattern command. Further, for the decorative pattern, before the end of the fluctuation time designated in the fluctuation pattern, the temporary stop state (swing fluctuation state) is entered, and the symbol confirmation designation command (first symbol confirmation designation command, second symbol confirmation designation command, first Based on the reception of the compulsory symbol confirmation designation command, the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command), the confirmation stop state is entered. On the other hand, for the small symbols, the fixed stop state (swing fluctuation state) is not entered, and the fixed stop state is set based on the reception of the symbol fixed designation command. In addition, for the decorative pattern, it is possible to execute a revival effect after a temporary stop state out of reach to change the variable display result.

  Next, an effect mode of the shutter effect executed at the 50th variation of the irregular big hit or the low probability / high base state will be described. FIG. 9-43 is an explanatory diagram for describing an effect mode of shutter effect executed at the 50th variation of the irregular big hit or the low probability / high base state. Note that in FIG. 9-43, the effect screens transition in the order of (A), (B), (C), .... Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 9-43, as an example, the effect mode of the shutter effect executed at the 50th variation of the low probability / high base state is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 9-43 (A), in the low-probability / high-base state, for example, a character display 080IW031 such as “chance time” is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 and a right-hand stroke is instructed. Right-handed display 080IW032 is displayed. Since the right-handing notification is being made, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

  Then, the variation display of the 50th variation in the low probability / high base state is started, and the variation display of the 50th variation is the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-43 (B), an image in which the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 are closed is displayed on the image display device 5, the decorative pattern on the left middle right is hidden, and the shutter effect is produced. It is started (see step 080IWS508). Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-43 (C) to (F), the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 are gradually opened, and a display is made such that the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are gradually visible. Be seen.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 9-43 (G), the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 are completely opened and the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are completely visible, and the shutter effect is finished. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-43 (G), the character display 080IW035 such as "normal mode" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the character display 080IW036 such as "please return to the left" is displayed. , It is informed that the low probability / low base state (normal state) has been returned, and a display prompting a left-handed operation is performed.

  FIG. 9-44 is an explanatory diagram for describing image data used in a shutter effect. Further, FIG. 9-45 is an explanatory diagram for describing a display method of a still image used in a shutter effect. In this example, when the shutter effect is started, the moving image data in which the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 are gradually closed from the upper and lower sides is not reproduced, but the first one as shown in FIG. A still image is displayed based on the still image data with the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 closed. In this case, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-43 (B) and 9-44 (A), the effect image 080IW037 is displayed near the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034. Further, when the still image is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 9-45 (A) to (C), the still image is controlled to be oscillated and displayed in small increments in the vertical direction as time passes T. By displaying as such, in the present example, a still image is actually displayed, but from a player's point of view, it gives an impression as if the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 were instantaneously closed. Have control.

  In this example, by performing control to display a still image as shown in FIGS. 9-43 (B) and 9-44 (A) in the shutter effect, for example, the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 are closed. Compared with the case of reproducing a moving image, the production process of image data can be suppressed at a low cost, and the display screen of the image display device 5 can be covered instantly, so that the decorative pattern can be hidden quickly.

  In this example, the effect image 080IW037 is displayed, or the still image is oscillated in the vertical direction in small increments, so that the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 are displayed as if they were instantly closed. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when a still image is displayed, a sound effect such as the shutter being closed is output, or by vibrating and displaying a character object or an operation button, the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 are displayed as if they were instantly closed. You may comprise.

  Then, after the still image shown in FIG. 9-44 (A) is displayed, the moving image data shown in FIGS. 9-44 (B) to (C) is reproduced to generate the moving image data shown in FIGS. 9-43 (C) to (F). The effect that the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 are gradually opened is displayed as shown in FIG.

  In this example, for the effect that the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 are closed, the decorative pattern is hidden in a moment by using a still image, while the moving image is reproduced for the effect that the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 are opened. However, when the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 are opened, the fanfare effect and the effect in the waiting state for passing the gate are executed, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is not already displayed. Even if the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 are gradually opened, there is no risk of erroneously recognizing the variable display of the decorative pattern.

  FIG. 9-46 is an explanatory diagram showing the types of images displayed in the shutter effect. In this example, the shutter effect shown in FIG. 9-43 is when an irregular big hit occurs or when the variable display of the 50th variation of the low probability / high base state is executed. When the shutter effect is executed in the variable display of the 50th variation, the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 including the characters “END” are displayed as shown in FIG. The shutter effect for ending) is executed (see step 080IWS508). Further, when an irregular big hit occurs when the gaming state is a low probability / low base state (normal state) or when the gaming state is a low probability / high base state, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (B). The upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 including the characters "intense heat standby" are displayed, and the shutter effect (normal / time saving shutter effect) is executed (see steps 080IWS503, S512). Further, when the irregular jackpot occurs when the gaming state is the high probability / low base state (second KT state), the upper and lower shutters 080IW033,034 including numbers as shown in FIG. 9-46 (C). Is displayed, and the shutter effect accompanied by the count display (shutter effect for small hit RUSH) is executed (see step 080IWS506).

  Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 9-46, when an irregular jackpot occurs when the game state is a high probability / high base state, a shutter effect for the high probability / high base state is generated. Executed. In this case, for example, the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 including characters such as “Lowing” may be displayed to execute the shutter effect.

  Next, while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol will be described. FIG. 9-47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed.

  During the variable display of the first special symbol to be a big hit, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is a certain variation big hit (in this example, the first In the case of a big hit variation which is a probability big hit, a second probability big hit, and a third probability big hit), as shown in FIG. 9-47 (A), even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special symbol The variable display is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first variation time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variation time timer is restarted (step 080IWS1120A, (See Y in step 080IWS1133A).

  On the other hand, if the variation display of the first special symbol is a big hit variation that is usually a big hit, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (B), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special symbol The variable display of is also forcibly stopped and displayed with a deviating symbol (N in step 080IWS1133A, see step 080IWS1134A).

  In addition, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol that is out of sync or small hit, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (C), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first variation time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variation time timer is restarted (step 080IWS1120A, (See N in step 080IWS1132A).

  During the variable display of the second special symbol to be a big hit, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is a sure change big hit (in this example, the first In the case of a big hit variation which is a certain probability variation big hit, a second probability variation big hit, and a third probability variation big hit, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (D), even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol The variable display is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 080IWS1120B, (See Y in step 080IWS1133B).

  On the other hand, if the variation display of the second special symbol is a big hit variation that is usually a big hit, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (E), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol is displayed. The variable display of is also forcibly stopped and displayed with a deviating symbol (N in step 080IWS1133B, see step 080IWS1134B).

  In addition, during the variable display of the second special symbol that is out and small hit, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (F), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 080IWS1120B, (See N in step 080IWS1132B).

  The control method in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the one special symbol is not limited to the mode shown in this example. Hereinafter, a modified example of the control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed will be described.

(Modification 1)
FIG. 9-48 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first modification. 9-48, the processes of steps 080IWS1120A to S1132A are similar to those shown in FIG. 9-12, but in the modified example 1, the determination process of step 080IWS1133A shown in FIG. 9-12 does not exist. ..

  In Modification 1, if the variable display of the first special symbol that is being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 directly shifts to the process of step S1134A and transmits the first compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 080IWS1134A). 9-48, the processing of step 080IWS1135A is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 9-12.

  FIG. 9-49 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process in the first modification. 9-49, the processes of steps 080IWS1120B to S1132B are similar to those shown in FIG. 9-15, but in the modified example 1, the determination process of step 080IWS1133B shown in FIG. 9-15 does not exist. .

  In the first modification, if the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 directly shifts to the process of step S1134B, and transmits the second compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 080IWS1134B). 9-49, the processing of step 080IWS1135B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 9-15.

  9-50 is an explanatory view for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit is made in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed in the modified example 1. FIG.

  During the variable display of the first special symbol that is a big hit, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, is the variable display of the first special symbol a big change of a big hit? Regardless of whether it is a big hit variation that is usually a big hit, as shown in FIG. 9-50 (A), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forced to be a deviating symbol. It is stopped and displayed (N in step 080IWS1132A, see step 080IWS1134A).

  On the other hand, during the variable display of the first special symbol that is out or a small hit, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-50 (B), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first variation time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variation time timer is restarted (step 080IWS1120A, (See N in step 080IWS1132A).

  During the variable display of the second special symbol that is a big hit, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, is the variable display of the second special symbol a big change that is a sure change big hit? Regardless of whether it is a big hit variation that is usually a big hit, as shown in FIG. 9-50 (C), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is also forced to be a deviating symbol. It is stopped and displayed (N in step 080IWS1132B, see step 080IWS1134B).

  On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that is out of alignment or the small hit, as shown in FIG. 9-50 (D), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 080IWS1120B, (See N in step 080IWS1132B).

(Modification 2)
FIG. 9-51 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the second modification. 9-51, the processes of steps 080IWS1120A to S1131A are similar to those shown in FIG. 9-12, but in the second modification, the determination process of steps 080IWS1132A and S1133A shown in FIG. 9-12 is performed. Instead, it includes the processing of step 080IWS1132C.

  In Modification 2, if the variable display of the first special symbol that is being executed is a big hit, the process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the variation display of the first special symbol that is being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1134A). Note that in FIG. 9-51, the process of step 080IWS1135A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 9-12.

  FIG. 9-52 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process in Modification 2. 9-52, the processes of steps 080IWS1120B to S1131B are similar to those shown in FIG. 9-15, but in the second modification, the determination process of steps 080IWS1132B and S1133B shown in FIG. 9-15 is performed. Instead, it includes the processing of step 080IWS1132D.

  In the second modification, if the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is a big hit, the process ends. On the other hand, if the variation display of the second special symbol that is being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 controls to send the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1134B). 9-52, the processing of step 080IWS1135B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 9-15.

  FIG. 9-53 is an explanatory view for explaining control of variable display when a small hit occurs in variable display of the other special symbol during execution of variable display of one special symbol in the modified example 2.

  During the variable display of the first special symbol that is a big hit, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, is the variable display of the first special symbol a big change of a big hit? Regardless of whether it is a big hit variation that is usually a big hit, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (A), the variation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first variation time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the first fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 080IWS1120A, (See Y in step 080IWS1132C).

  On the other hand, during the variable display of the first special symbol that is out of place or a small hit, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (B), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a symbol (N in step 080IWS1132C, see step 080IWS1134A).

  During the variable display of the second special symbol that is a big hit, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, is the variable display of the second special symbol a big change that is a sure change big hit? Regardless of whether it is a big hit variation that is usually a big hit, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (C), the variation display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 080IWS1120B, (See Y in step 080IWS1132D).

  On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol which is out of alignment or the small hit, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (D), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a deviating symbol (N in step 080IWS1132D, see step 080IWS1134B).

  Further, as a control method in the case where a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed, other than those shown in the modified examples 1 and 2, for example, When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol, the forced stop is stopped, while the variable display of the first special symbol that is the small hit is displayed. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation may be continued.

  Further, for example, during the normal state (low probability / low base state), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is deviated and changed, Either the small hit variation or the big hit variation may be configured to be forcedly stopped. With such a configuration, in this example, when the variable display is completed 50 times in the low probability / high base state, the state is changed to the low probability / low base state (see FIG. 9-24). When 1 to 4 second reserved memories are accumulated when the variable display is ended and the state is shifted to the low probability / low base state, and there is a second reserved memory that is a big hit, it is forcedly stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent a big hit at an unintended timing. Further, in particular, in the gaming machine configured to be controllable in the KT state as in this example, by performing a right-handed operation in a normal state (low probability / low base state), a second starting winning opening for easy starting winning is obtained. It is also possible to use a strategy that allows a winning prize to be started and a variable display of the second special symbol to be displayed, and a winning prize to be started at the first start winning a prize port and a variable display of the first special symbol to be performed. It is effective as a method prevention measure.

  As described above, various modes are conceivable as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the present characteristic portion 080IW, in the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the same control is forcibly performed to stop and display the deviating symbol. Although the case (see FIG. 9-47) is shown, different controls may be used. FIG. 9-54 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process in Modification 3. In Modification 3, the first special symbol variation process is the same as the process shown in FIGS. 9-12. 9-54, the processes of steps 080IWS1120B to S1130B are similar to those shown in FIG. 9-15, but in the modified example 3, the determination processes of steps 080IWS1131B to S1133B shown in FIG. 9-15 are performed. not exist. Therefore, in the modification 3, if the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (N in step 080IWS1130B), the CPU 103 ends the process as it is.

  FIG. 9-55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining control of variable display when a small hit occurs in variable display of the other special symbol during execution of variable display of one special symbol in Modification 3.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-55 (A) and (C), in the third modification, the small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol which is the deviation, the small hit, and the probability variation big hit. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as in FIGS. 9-47 (A) and (C). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-55 (D) and (F), the small hit pattern stops in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol that is a deviation, a small hit, and a probability variation big hit. When displayed, similarly to FIGS. 9-47 (D) and (F), the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-55 (B), in Modification 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit. In the same manner as in FIG. 9-47 (B), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcedly stopped and displayed as a falling symbol.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-55 (E), in the modification 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit. In contrast to FIG. 9-47 (E), the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 9-55, in the modified example 3, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. The control to stop and display is different.

  In the modified example 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol while the variable display of the first special symbol, which is normally the big hit, is being executed, the normal big hit is stopped. While the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed during the variable display of the second special symbol, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it is shown that the variable display is continued, but only in such a mode. Absent. For example, conversely, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol while the variable display of the first special symbol that is normally a big hit is being executed, the variable display is continued, while the normal big hit is When the small hitting symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, it may be configured to be forcedly stopped. Further, for example, (regardless of whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit) When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable indication of the second special symbol while the variable indication of the first special symbol which is a big hit is being executed, it is forcibly removed. While stopping, regardless of whether it is a big jackpot or a normal jackpot, it changes when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol while the variable display of the second special symbol that is a big hit is being executed. The display may be continued. As such, in some form, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol and when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the control for forced disengagement stop may be different.

(Modification 4)
FIG. 9-56 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in Modification 4. 9-56, the processes of steps 080IWS1120A to S1133A are the same as those shown in FIG. 9-12.

  In Modification 4, in step 080IWS1133A, if the first special variation big hit, the second certainty variation big hit, and the third certainty variation big hit are neither (that is, the normal big hit) first special symbol variation display is being executed. , CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 080IWS1131A). If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if it is not the probability variation state), the process is ended as it is. If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state), the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1134A). Note that the processing of step 080IWS1135A is the same as the processing shown in FIG.

  In Modification 4, by executing the determination process of step 080IWS1131A, during the variable display of the first special symbol, which is usually a big hit, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, The variable display of the first special symbol is not forcibly stopped and displayed in the deviating symbol, but the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the deviating symbol when the probability change state is in progress. On the other hand, even during the variable display of the first special symbol that is usually a big hit, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued unless it is in the probability change state.

  FIG. 9-57 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process in Modification 4. 9-57, the processes of steps 080IWS1120B to S1133B are the same as those shown in FIG. 9-15.

  In Modification 4, in step 080IWS1133B, if the first special variation big hit, the second certainty variation big hit, and the third certainty variation big hit will not be any (that is, the normal big jackpot) variation display of the first special symbol is being executed. The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 080IWS1131B). If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if it is not the probability variation state), the process is ended as it is. If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state), the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS1134B). The process of step 080IWS1135B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 9-15.

  In Modification 4, when the determination process of step 080IWS1131B is executed, while the small special symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit, The variable display of the second special symbol is not forced to be stopped and displayed as a detached symbol, but the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed as a detached symbol when the probability change state is in progress. On the other hand, even during the variation display of the second special symbol that is usually a big hit, if the small variation symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is continued unless it is in the probability variation state.

  In Modification 4, the case is shown in which control is forcibly stopped and displayed with a deviating symbol depending on whether the probability variation flag is set (whether or not it is in the probability variation state), but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, it may be configured to perform control to forcibly stop and display a symbol depending on whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set. Further, for example, only in the high-probability / low-base state (the high-probability flag is on, the high-base flag is off), the control for forcibly stopping and displaying the symbol may be performed. As such, it may be configured in any form so as to perform control to forcibly stop and display the symbol according to the current game state.

  In addition, as described above, when configured to perform control to forcibly stop and display with a symbol only in the high probability / low base state, it is possible to prevent a big jackpot from being normally displayed on the variable display of one identification information, It is possible to prevent the second KT state (small hit RUSH) from being interrupted.

(Modification 5)
Further, in this example, depending on whether it is a period for performing a left-handed operation or a period for performing a right-handed operation, a decorative design is displayed in correspondence with the first special design or in correspondence with the second special design. While switching between displaying the decorative design, the first small design and the second small design are both displayed continuously, but it is a period for performing a left-handing operation or a period for performing a right-handing operation. Depending on whether there is one, it may be configured to switch whether to display the first small symbol or the second small symbol.

  FIG. 9-58 is an explanatory diagram for describing a manner of switching the display of a decorative pattern according to the fifth modification. In FIG. 9-58, the manner of switching the decorative pattern is the same as that shown in FIG. 9-42. In this example, as shown in the left column of FIG. 9-58 (1) and the right column of FIG. 9-58 (2), the state is controlled to the low probability / low base state (normal state) and the left-handing operation is performed. In the case of, the second small symbol display area 080IW012 is erased based on the reception of the right-handed lighting end designation command, and only the display of the first small symbol in the first small symbol display area 080IW011 is displayed. The state can be switched. Further, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-58 (1), the left column of FIG. 9-58 (2), and the high probability state or the high base state as shown in FIG. 9-58 (3), the right column is controlled. When the striking operation is performed, the first small symbol display area 080IW011 is erased based on the reception of the right striking lighting start designation command, and the second small symbol is displayed in the second small symbol display area 080IW012. It is possible to switch to the state where only is displayed.

(Modification 6)
In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, the case where the right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted is shown, but the right-handed lighting start designation command is transmitted. You may. FIG. 9-59 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing in the sixth modification. Note that in Modification 6, the processes of steps 080IWS2010A to S2027A are the same as those shown in FIG. 9-13.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step 080IWS2028A). If the special drawing time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right hitting lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 080IWS2030A). Note that the processing of steps 080IWS2031A to S2032A is the same as those shown in FIG. 9-13.

  Further, in the modified example 6, since the right hitting lighting start designation command is transmitted even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, when the small hit game is finished, In the small hit ending process shown in 9-22, the same process as in step 080IWS2307 is executed and the right-handed lighting end designation command is transmitted.

  FIG. 9-60 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step 080IWS205) in Modification 6. Note that in Modification 6, the processes of steps 080IWS611 to S639, S640 to S643, S644 to S672 are the same as those shown in FIGS. 9-27 to 9-30.

  If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 080IWS639), the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the small hit game state by confirming the small hit symbol in the variable display of the first special symbol. It is confirmed whether it is the case (step 080IWS639X). Whether or not the small hit symbol is fixedly displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol and is controlled in the small hit game state, for example, while the small hit start designation command is received, It can be determined by confirming whether or not the small hit symbol is fixedly displayed as the stop symbol of the 1 small symbol. If the small hit symbol is fixedly displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol and is controlled to the small hit game state (Y of step 080IWS639X), the step of 080IWS640 to S642 is not executed and the step is directly performed. Move to 080IWS611.

  If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 080IWS643), the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the small hit game state by confirming the small hit symbol in the variable display of the first special symbol. It is confirmed whether it is the case (step 080IWS643X). If the small hit symbol is fixedly displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol and is controlled to the small hit game state (Y of step 080IWS643X), the steps of 080IWS644 to S649 are not executed but the step is directly performed. Move to 080IWS611.

  According to the modified example 6, the variable display of the first special symbol is transmitted even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the small hit occurs, and the right-handed lighting start designation command is transmitted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed on the CPU 120 side for effect control. Is executed to determine that it is a small hit and control not to perform the right hitting notification, and whether to display the decorative symbol corresponding to which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Is controlled not to switch.

  As described above, according to the feature section 080IW, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are performed in parallel. Is feasible. In addition, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state), and a non-special state (for example, low It is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) that is controlled more frequently than the probability / low base state (normal state). As the special state, it is possible to control the first special state (for example, the first KT state) and the second special state (for example, the second KT state) that is more advantageous than the first special state, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is possible to control to the second special state based on what is done (for example, the third probability variation big hit, the high probability / high base state (first KT state), and the variation display of 50 times or 100 times is completed). is there. Further, in the case of controlling to the advantageous state based on the variable display of the second identification information when controlled to the non-special state, based on the variable display of the second identification information when controlled to the second special state. The predetermined condition is less likely to be established than in the case of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, during the high probability / low base state (second KT state), the first certainty variation big hit or the second certainty variation big hit. When it occurs, it is immediately controlled to the high probability / low base state (second KT state), while the 1st probability variation big hit and the 2nd probability variation big hit occur during the low probability / low base state (normal state). If so, the high probability / high base state (first KT state) is controlled, and then the high probability / low base state (second KT state) is controlled when 50 or 100 times of variable display is finished). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the special state is controllable.

  In particular, in this example, since the low-probability / low-base state (normal state) is in the left-hand striking operation period, a big hit is usually generated in the variable display of the first special symbol. Therefore, a big hit occurs during the low-probability / low-base state (normal state) when the second reserved memory remaining after the high-probability / low-base state (second KT state) ends is a big hit. In the case of a hit, or when a low probability / low base state (normal state) dare right-handed operation to execute the variable display of the second special symbol and a big hit occurs, a situation that should rarely occur Is. In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the low probability / low base state (normal state) to be a big hit, the high probability / after the variable display of 100 times or 50 times is finished / By providing a case where the player is controlled to a low base state (second KT state), a penalty is provided for a confrontational operation such as a right-handed operation in such a normal state, while the interest in the game is reduced. I am trying to suppress it.

  In this example, as a specific example in the case where “the predetermined condition is difficult to be satisfied”, the high probability / low base state (second KT state) is immediately controlled in the high probability / low base state (second KT state) ( That is, in contrast to the high base number 0 times, in the low probability / low base state (normal state), when the variable display is completed 50 times or 100 times, the high probability / low base state (second KT state) is set. Although the case of being controlled (ie, 50 or 100 times of high base number) is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, even when a big hit occurs in the high-probability / low-base state (second KT state), the high-probability / high-base state (first KT state) is temporarily controlled to display a relatively small number of 10 or 30 times of variable display. When it is finished, it is controlled to the high probability / low base state (second KT state), while in the low probability / low base state (normal state), when the variable display of 50 times or 100 times, which is a relatively large number, is finished, It may be configured to be controlled to a high probability / low base state (second KT state). As such, the time until the high probability / low base state (the second KT state) shifts to the high probability / low base state (the second KT state) rather than the high probability / low base state (the second KT state) in some form. It may be configured so that it is difficult to shift to the high-probability / low-base state (second KT state) due to, for example, the above.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, when the first probability variation big hit or the second probability variation big hit occurs during the low probability / high base state or during the high probability / high base state, the fluctuation display is performed 50 times. Is controlled to a high-probability / low-base state (second KT state) after the end of, and a higher-probability / lower-base than when the first probable-variable jackpot or the second-probable-variable jackpot is reached during the high-probability / low-base state. The case where the configuration is configured to make it difficult to shift to the state (second KT state) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, during the low probability / high base state, the probability factor is low even during the high probability / high base state, and the penalty factor is low. Therefore, as in the high probability / low base state, immediately the high probability / low base state ( The second KT state) may be controlled.

  Further, according to this characteristic unit 080IW, when the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display of the first identification information when the second special state is controlled, when the second special state is controlled, the first state is controlled when the non-special state is controlled. The predetermined condition is more likely to be established than in the case of being controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display of the 1 identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, the first condition is set during the low probability / low base state (normal state)). When the probability variation big hit or the second probability variation big hit occurs, it is controlled to the high probability / high base state (first KT state), and when the variable display of 50 times or 100 times is finished thereafter, the high probability / low base state (first 2KT state), the high probability / low base state (second KT state) is immediately generated when the first probability variation big hit or the second probability variation big hit occurs during the high probability / low base state (second KT state). State), As shown in duck Figure 9-3, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed a high selectivity split ratio of the first probability variation big hit and the second probability variation big hit). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest.

  In particular, immediately after the transition from the low probability / low base state (normal state) to the high probability / low base state (second KT state), when the variable display of the first special symbol again causes a big hit, the first rate is high. There is a possibility that it will be a probability variation jackpot or a second probability variation jackpot. In this case, the high-probability / low-base state (second KT state) ends like a penalty and the high-probability / high-base state (first KT state) is entered. If this happens, the player may be disappointed. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-23, during the high-probability / low-base state (second KT state), the high-probability / low-base state (second KT state) is immediately generated even in the first probability variation big hit or the second probability variation big hit. It is controlled to prevent such disappointment. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the occasion of an irregular big hit.

  In the present example, during the high probability / low base state (second KT state), the high probability / low base state (second KT state) is immediately controlled even in the first probability variation big hit or the second probability variation big hit. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in the high-probability / low-base state (second KT state), when the first probabilistic big hit or the second probable-variable big hit is completed, the high-probability / low-base is displayed when a relatively small number of 10 or 30 times of variable display ends. It may be configured to be controlled to the state (the second KT state), and may be configured to "satisfy the predetermined condition" in some form in such a manner.

  Further, according to the characteristic part 080IW, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different degrees of advantage for the player. Further, when the set value with a low degree of advantage (for example, the set value “1”) is set, the predetermined condition is more easily established than when the set value with a high degree of advantage is set. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, since the jackpot probability is the lowest at the setting value “1”, the jackpot is a jackpot in the high-probability / high-base state (first KT state). It is easy to execute the variable display up to 100 times or 100 times, and easily transition to the high probability / low base state (second KT state). Therefore, even if the advantage is set to a low set value, it is possible to make expectations and improve interest in the game.

  In addition, according to this feature section 080IW, when the game state is switched (for example, when an irregular big hit occurs, when the variable display of the 50th variation in the low probability / high base state is executed), a predetermined display ( For example, it is possible to execute a special effect (for example, a shutter effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the left, middle, and right decorative patterns. As a special effect, a specific image (for example, a still image in which the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 shown in FIGS. 9-43 (B) and 9-44 (A) are closed) is displayed, and the predetermined display is difficult to visually recognize. After performing the effect, the specific image is separated and the predetermined display becomes visible (for example, in FIGS. 9-43 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 9-44 (B) and (C)). The upper and lower shutters 080IW033 and 034 shown in FIG. Therefore, in the special effect, it is possible to smoothly hide the predetermined display and switch the display with a simple display. In addition, it is possible to save the video production period and production cost for the special production.

  In addition, according to the feature section 080IW, when the game state is switched (for example, when the irregular big hit occurs, when the variable display of the 50th variation in the low probability / high base state is executed), the specific image ( For example, a predetermined display (for example, a left middle right decorative pattern) is displayed by displaying a still image in which the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 shown in FIGS. 9-43 (B) and 9-44 (A) are closed. It is possible to execute a special effect (for example, shutter effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize. Further, it is possible to display a plurality of types of specific images (for example, still images shown in FIGS. 9-46 (A) to (C)), and different types of specific images depending on the game state when controlled to the advantageous state. Is displayed (for example, when the shutter effect is executed in the variable display of the 50th variation in the low-probability / high-base state, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (A), the upper and lower parts including the characters “END” are displayed). Shutter 080IW033, 034 is displayed, and when the irregular jackpot occurs when the game state is the low probability / low base state (normal state) or the low probability / high base state, FIG. 9-46 ( As shown in B), the upper and lower shutters 080IW033, 034 including the characters “intense heat standby” are displayed, and the irregular size is large when the gaming state is the high probability / low base state (second KT state). Ri when it generated the upper and lower shutter 080IW033,034 containing numbers is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-46 (C)). Therefore, in the special effect, it is possible to smoothly hide the predetermined display and switch the display with a simple display. In addition, it is possible to save the video production period and production cost for the special production.

  Also, for example, when a normal big hit occurs during the high-probability / high-base state or the high-probability / low-base state, the probability variation state ends or the second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends. Although it is not necessarily in an advantageous state because it is lost, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (C), a shutter effect accompanied by a count display or a shutter effect including characters such as “Lowing” is executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively agitated.

  In addition, according to this characteristic part 080IW, it is possible to control to a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hitting game state), and a special state is likely to give a game value (for example, high probability / low base). State (the second KT state)). Therefore, by providing a situation in which a game value due to a special state is likely to be provided, the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the characteristic part 080IW, it is possible to execute the variable display of the effect identification information (for example, the decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information. Further, in response to the transition of the game state, a special image (for example, shutter effect image 080IW017) is displayed in the display area in which the effect identification information is variably displayed, and the visibility of the effect identification information is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity between the effect identification information and the gaming state from occurring at the timing of transition to the gaming state.

  Further, according to the characteristic unit 080IW, it is possible to control to a predetermined state (for example, high base state) in which the execution frequency of the variable display of the second identification information is increased compared to a non-predetermined state (for example, low base state). , Special effect for displaying a special image (for example, a shutter effect image 080IW017 shown in FIG. 9-41) for notifying that the game state is highly visible when the predetermined state shifts to the non-predetermined state ( For example, when the shutter effect) is executed and the special effect is executed, non-display control of the effect identification information is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity between the effect identification information and the gaming state when the predetermined state is shifted to the non-predetermined state, and reduce the processing load related to the display of the effect identification information.

  In addition, according to this characteristic part 080IW, it is possible to control to a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hitting game state), and a special state is likely to give a game value (for example, high probability / low base). State (the second KT state)). In addition, a transition effect (for example, shutter effect) can be executed when the special state is controlled after the end of the advantageous state, and non-display control of effect identification information is performed when the transition effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity between the effect identification information and the gaming state when the special state is controlled after the end of the advantageous state, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display of the effect identification information.

  Further, according to this feature unit 080IW, the non-display control of the effect identification information is started in response to the transition of the game state, and the effect is produced based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the start of the variable display of the next decorative design). The non-display control of the identification information ends. Therefore, it is possible to display the production identification information again while preventing a sense of discomfort between the production identification information and the game state.

  In addition, in this example, the case where the display of the decorative pattern and the hold display is restarted based on the start of the next variable display of the decorative pattern as the predetermined condition is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, based on the lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) from the start of non-display of the decorative pattern or the hold display, the display of the decorative pattern or the hold display is restarted assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied. You may comprise.

  Further, according to this feature unit 080IW, information regarding variable display can be stored as a hold storage, the hold display can be displayed in correspondence with the hold storage, and the hold display is not displayed during the non-display control of the effect identification information. Display state. Therefore, in addition to the processing load related to the display of the effect identification information, the processing load related to the display of the hold display can be reduced.

  Further, according to the feature section 080IW, it is possible to execute variable display of reduced identification information (for example, small design (first small design, second small design)) in a mode in which the performance identification information is reduced, and the production identification information. The reduced identification information is displayed regardless of whether the non-display control is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to recognize the game situation even during the non-display control of the effect identification information.

  Further, according to the characteristic part 080IW, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result (eg, big hit symbol), it is possible to control to an advantageous state (eg, big hit game state). Further, when the non-display control of the effect identification information is ended, a combination of the effect identification information of the display result different from the specific display result is displayed (for example, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-42 (2), Display the decorative pattern by switching to the initial appearance). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is erroneously recognized that the control is performed in the advantageous state.

  Further, according to this feature unit 080IW, after the variable display of the effect identification information is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, the specific condition (for example, transition to the probability variation state or the high base state) is satisfied. Based on this, the variable display of the effect identification information is performed corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. In addition, in response to the variable condition of the first identification information based on the fact that the special condition (for example, the final fluctuation (for example, the 50th fluctuation) in the low probability / high base state is executed) is satisfied after the specific condition is satisfied. Variable display of performance identification information is executed. In addition, the display result is different from the display result of the variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information when the specific condition is satisfied, and corresponds to the variable display of the first identification information when the special condition is satisfied. The display result of the variable display of the effect identification information is displayed (for example, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-42 (2), the decorative pattern is switched to the initial appearance and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation where the gaming situation is mistakenly recognized.

  Further, according to the characteristic part 080IW, it is possible to control in a plurality of types of game states (for example, a big hit game state, a probability variation state, a high base state). In addition, the variable display of the first special identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second special identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed, and the variable display of the first special identification information can be performed. Correspondingly, a first effect variable display that performs variable display of effect identification information (for example, decorative design) and a second effect variable that executes variable display of effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of second special identification information. Either one of the display and the display can be executed as a variable display. In addition, based on the reception of the state transition information (for example, the right-handed lighting start designation command, the right-handed lighting end designation command) corresponding to the gaming state transition, the first effect variable display and the second effect variable display Variable display is switched from one of them to the other (for example, switching to display of decorative design corresponding to the second special design based on receipt of right striking lighting start designation command, and receipt of right striking end designation command) Based on this, switch to the display of the decorative design corresponding to the first special design). Therefore, it is possible to switch the variable display from one of the first effect variable display and the second effect variable display to the other based on the reception of the state transition information, so that the processing load of the effect control can be reduced. it can.

  For example, as shown in this example, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol In order to switch between which to display the decorative symbol corresponding to which, it is necessary to monitor both the variation state of the first special symbol and the variation state of the second special symbol, the processing load on the effect control CPU 120 side There is a possibility that the number of decorative patterns will increase and smooth switching of the display of the decorative pattern cannot be performed. Therefore, in this example, by displaying the decorative pattern based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command and the right-handed lighting end designation command transmitted in association with the change in the game state, It is possible to prevent an unnecessary processing load from being exerted on the side of the production control CPU 120 and to smoothly switch the display of the decorative pattern.

  In this example, the display of the decorative pattern is switched based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command or the right-handed lighting end designation command as the state transition information, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when it is configured to be able to transmit a background designating command that can specify the game state, it may be configured to determine the game state based on the reception of the background designating command as state transition information and switch the display of the decorative design. Good. Further, for example, when a game state designation command capable of specifying the game state itself is configured to be transmittable, the game state is judged based on the reception of the game state designation command as the state transition information, and the display of the decorative symbol is switched. It may be configured as follows. As such, various modes can be considered as the state transition information.

  Further, according to the characteristic unit 080IW, the variable display of the first special identification information and the variable display of the second special identification information can be executed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load particularly when the variable display of the first special identification information and the variable display of the second special identification information can be executed in parallel.

  In this example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executable in parallel, but the invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in the gaming machine configured to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in the winning order of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, the characteristic portion 080IW is shown. Other configurations may be applied. Further, for example, in the gaming machine configured to execute the variable display of the second special symbol in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol, the configuration shown by this characteristic unit 080IW may be applied.

  Further, according to this characteristic unit 080IW, it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state), and it is possible to control to a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state). , It is possible to control to a special state (for example, a high-probability / low-base state (second KT state)) in which a game value is easily given by the special state. Therefore, by providing a situation in which a game value due to a special state is likely to be provided, the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the modified example 5 of the present characteristic part 080IW, it is possible to perform variable display of reduced identification information (for example, small design (first small design, second small design)) in a mode in which effect identification information is reduced. Corresponding to the first reduced variable display for performing the variable display of the reduced identification information in response to the variable display of the first special identification information and the variable display of the second special identification information based on the reception of the state transition information. Then, the variable display is switched from one of the second reduced variable display for performing the variable display of reduced identification information to the other (for example, refer to FIG. 9-58). Therefore, the variable display of the reduced identification information can be switched in correspondence with the state transition information, so that the processing load of the effect control can be further reduced.

  In addition, according to the feature portion 080IW, the variable display of the special identification information (for example, the fourth symbol) whose visibility is lower than that of the production identification information is executed by the variable display mode different from the production identification information, and the state transition information. The variable display of the special identification information is executed regardless of whether or not is received. Therefore, even if the variable display of the effect identification information is switched, the game situation can be recognized.

  Further, according to the characteristic part 080IW, as the state transition information, it is a situation in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) is ejected to a predetermined region (for example, a region on the right side of the game region) of the game region. The variable display is switched from one of the first effect variable display and the second effect variable display to the other based on the reception of predetermined operation information indicating that (for example, a right-handed lighting start designation command) (for example, Based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designating command, the display is switched to the display of the decorative design corresponding to the second special design). Therefore, it is possible to combine the information indicating the situation of performing the shooting operation of the game medium and the information corresponding to the transition of the game state, and it is possible to reduce the storage area of the information.

  In addition, according to this feature section 080IW, the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) provided is totaled. Also, based on the reception of the predetermined operation information, start the aggregation of the game value, and perform the operation of ejecting the game medium to a specific area (for example, the left area of the game area) other than the predetermined area in the game area. Based on the reception of the specific operation information indicating the situation (for example, the right-handed lighting end designation command), the totalization of the game value is finished. Therefore, it is possible to manage the totalization of the game value triggered by the reception of the information indicating the situation in which the game medium is ejected.

  In addition, according to the feature section 080IW, a special image (for example, a shutter effect image 080IW017) is displayed in the display area in which the effect identification information is variably displayed in response to the transition of the game state, and the effect identification information is visually recognized. Reduce sex. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity between the effect identification information and the gaming state from occurring at the timing of transition to the gaming state.

  Further, according to the feature section 080IW, after the variable display of the effect identification information is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information, the specific condition (for example, transition to the probability variation state or the high base state) is satisfied. Based on this, the variable display of the effect identification information is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information. In addition, it corresponds to the variable display of the first special identification information based on the fact that the special condition (for example, the final change in the low probability / high base state (for example, the 50th change) is executed) is satisfied after the specific condition is satisfied. Variable display of the performance identification information is executed. Further, with the display result different from the display result of the variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information when the specific condition is satisfied, the variable display of the first special identification information when the special condition is satisfied. The display result of the variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to is displayed (for example, as shown in the right column of FIG. 9-42 (2), the decorative pattern is switched to the initial appearance and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation where the gaming situation is mistakenly recognized.

  Further, according to this characteristic unit 080IW, it is possible to control to a predetermined state (for example, a high base state) in which the execution frequency of the variable display of the second special identification information is higher than that in the non-predetermined state. Therefore, by providing the predetermined state in which the execution frequency of the variable display of the second special identification information is increased, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, according to this characteristic unit 080IW, it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and it is possible to control to a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state). , State transition information (for example, a right-handed lighting start designation command, a right-handed lighting end designation command) is transmitted. In addition, the state transition information is not transmitted when the special state is controlled in the non-predetermined state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the control for switching the variable display of the effect identification information from being unnecessarily executed, and reduce the processing load of the effect control.

  Further, according to the sixth modification of the characteristic part 080IW, the state transition information is transmitted even when the special state is controlled in the non-predetermined state. Further, even if the state transition information is received, when the non-predetermined state is controlled to the special state, the first effect variable display and the second effect variable display are not switched. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the control load of the variable display of the effect identification information from being unnecessarily executed while preventing an increase in the control load on the information transmission side, and to reduce the effect control processing load.

  Further, according to this feature unit 080IW, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) in parallel. , It is possible to control to an advantageous state (eg, big hit game state) advantageous to the player when a specific display result (eg, big hit pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and is special as a display result of the variable display. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small hitting game state) different from the advantageous state when the display result (for example, a small hitting pattern) is derived and displayed. Further, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), and the one in which the first specific display result is derived and displayed is It is more advantageous for the player than the second specific display result is displayed for derivation (for example, it is controlled to a probable state after the jackpot game is over). Further, while the variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the first specific display result is being executed, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derived display, the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is not derived and displayed (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special symbol or the first special symbol or 2 Variable display of special symbols is continuously executed). Further, while the variable display of one identification information of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is being executed, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derived display, the one variable display of the identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, a deviating symbol) (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is deviating and is a symbol. It will be forced to stop). Therefore, control that considers the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display can be realized.

  Specifically, when the normal big hit (non-probable strange big hit) is displayed in the variable display corresponding to the remaining suspension of one of the identification information, even though the state shifts to the second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the positive hit state, The second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the probability variation state will end immediately, and there is a risk that the interest in the game will decrease. On the other hand, if the variation display corresponding to the remaining hold of the identification information on one side is forcibly and uniformly discontinued and the symbols are stopped (displaced forcibly), even if the variation display is a sure change jackpot, it is disengaged. As a result, the game value given to the player in the advantageous state (big hit game state) is reduced, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this feature unit 080IW, while the fluctuation display that is a normal big hit (non-probable variation big hit) is forced to be off, while the fluctuation display that is a probability big jackpot is extended by changing (the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted). , It is possible to improve the interest in the game while suppressing the decrease in the game value given to the player.

  In this example, as a mode that "variable display of one identification information is not stopped", the update of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is interrupted, and the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped), and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been interrupted after the small hit game is configured to be restarted. May be. It is sufficient that the variable display is not completely stopped in some way.

  Further, according to the characteristic part 080IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, the second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to the special state is easily given. Therefore, by providing a situation in which a game value is likely to be imparted due to the special state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change) that is a state different from the advantageous state and is easily controlled to the advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). State)). In addition, the first specific display result is derived and displayed, and is controlled to a specific state (for example, the probability variation state is controlled after the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot is controlled), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on that, it controls to a non-specific state (for example, it does not control to a probability change state after the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit). Therefore, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether the control is performed in the specific state.

  Further, according to the characteristic part 080IW, the special display result can be derived and displayed regardless of whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed ( 9-1 and 9-2). Further, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information while the variable display of the first identification information is performed corresponding to the second specific display result, the first identification is displayed. The variable display of information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (see FIG. 9-55 (B)). Further, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information while the variable display of the second identification information is being performed corresponding to the second specific display result, the second identification information is displayed. The control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the variable display is not performed (see FIG. 9-55 (E)). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information.

  Further, according to the feature unit 080IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change) that is a state different from the advantageous state and is easily controlled to the advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). State)). Further, the variable display execution means is a variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and is a variable display corresponding to the second specific display result when being controlled to the specific state. During execution of, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, and the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (FIGS. 9-56 and 9-). 57). In addition, when the variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, which is the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, is being performed when the non-specific state is controlled, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control of deriving and displaying the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (see FIGS. 9-56 and 9-57). ). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether or not the display is controlled to the specific state.

  Further, according to the present characteristic portion 080IW, the first identification information (eg, the first special symbol) based on that the game medium (eg, the game ball) has entered the first starting area (eg, the first starting winning opening). ) Variable display is possible, and based on the fact that the game medium has entered the second starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening), the variable display for the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is executed. It is possible. Also, variable means (for example, special variable winning) that can change between a first state (for example, open state) in which the game medium can enter and a second state (for example, closed state) in which the game medium is difficult or inaccessible A ball device 17). In addition, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state) and a special state having a lower degree of advantage than the advantageous state ( For example, a small hit game state) can be controlled, and when the special state is controlled, the variable means is controlled to the first state. In addition, the first starting area is provided so that a game medium that moves on a predetermined path (for example, an area on the left side of the game area) of the moving path on which the game medium can move can enter, and the variable means is a moving path. A game medium that moves on a specific route (for example, a region on the right side of the game region) is provided so that it can enter. Further, it is possible to execute a specific notification (for example, right-handed notification shown in (1) and (2) in FIG. 9-40) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the specific path, and the variable display of the first identification information is possible. When the special state is controlled after the execution of (1), the specific notification is not executed (for example, refer to FIG. 9-40 (3)). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the promotion of the launch of the game medium.

  Further, according to the characteristic unit 080IW, the first hold storage means (for example, the first hold storage buffer) capable of storing the information related to the variable display of the first identification information as the hold storage, and the variable display of the second identification information. And a second reserved storage unit (for example, a second reserved storage buffer) capable of storing information regarding the reserved storage. In addition, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information, it is in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state). It is controllable, and when a special display result (for example, a small hitting pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information (for example, It can be controlled to a small hit game state). Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency of the variable display of the second identification information becoming the special display result is increased. Further, based on the fact that when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, the special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of one variable display, As a display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, a deviating pattern) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly ended, and the pending storage can be smoothly consumed.

  In addition, according to this feature section 080IW, it is possible to give a predetermined value when controlled to a special state (for example, pay out 10 prize balls based on winning of a game ball to a special winning opening), It is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled in an advantageous state (for example, paying out 15 prize balls based on the winning of a game ball to the special winning opening). Further, as the specific notification, a first specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 9-40) and visual confirmation than the first specific notification It is possible to execute the second specific notification (for example, the display of the right-handed display 080IW007 shown in FIG. 9-40 (1)) having a high possibility. Further, when controlled to the advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (see FIG. 9-40 (1)), and the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and then the special state is controlled. If so, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (see FIG. 9-40 (2)). Therefore, it is possible to realize the notification corresponding to the value that can be given.

  Further, according to the characteristic part 080IW, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, a variable display of a decorative pattern) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, it is possible to execute a variable display effect in a common mode when it is controlled to a special state and when it is not controlled to a special state (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs. , Forcibly display non-reach outliers). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's recognizability of being controlled to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In addition, the reserved storage stored in the second reserved storage means can be smoothly consumed.

  Further, according to the characteristic unit 080IW, a delay unit (for example, a restriction piece provided on the variable winning ball device 6B) for delaying the movement of the game medium is provided on the upstream side of the variable unit on the specific path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the target from being aimed at the timing at which the control to the special state is performed after the variable display of the second identification information is normally performed. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen countermeasures against the game machine.

  The delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area, as a delay means, a passage member for moving the game ball to meander left and right is provided. You may.

  Further, according to this characteristic unit 080IW, the effect is produced based on information from the game control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) that controls the progress of the game, and the information from the game control means. The production control means (for example, CPU120 for production control) which controls is provided. Further, the game control means controls the execution of the notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed indicator 26) which performs a predetermined notification. Further, the effect control means performs a specific notification (for example, turning on the right-handed notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification means. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

  In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, right-handed notification is executed during the big hit game. Although the case is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a special variable winning ball device (left big winning opening) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning ball device (right big winning opening) is also provided on the right side of the playing area. If the variable display of the symbol is a big hit, the left big winning opening is opened during the big hit game, and if the big hit is a variable display of the second special symbol, the right big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. When applied to the gaming machine configured as described above, when the big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, while the right hitting notification is executed during the big hit game, in the variable display of the first special symbol In the case of a big hit, the right hit notification may not be executed during the big hit game. Further, in the case of such a configuration, it may be configured to execute a left-handed hit notification during a big hit game when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, the specific notification execution means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right special winning opening) is controlled to be in an advantageous state of a type in which it is controlled. With such a configuration, when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left hitting notification is executed during the big hitting game to prevent the player from mistakenly performing the right hitting operation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage of the player.

  Further, in the present example, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, so a case has been shown in which the right hit notification is executed even during the KT state. It is not limited to various forms. For example, when the second start winning port is applied to the gaming machine provided on the left side of the game area, the right-handed notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, or the time saving state. Good.

  In addition, in the present example, the right-hand strike notification is executed by displaying the right-hand strike display 080IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 in addition to turning on the right-hand strike indicator 26 and the right-hand strike notification LED 37 only during the big hit game. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, even in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH), in order to execute the first variable display after the end of the big hit game, in addition to turning on the right hit indicator 26 and the right hit notification LED 37 The right-handed notification may be executed by displaying the right-handed display 080IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, in this case, for example, in the ending period at the end of the big hit game, in addition to turning on the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handling notification LED 37, the right-handed display 080IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, the right-handed notification may be executed.

  Further, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the right-handed display 080IW007 having a relatively large size as shown in FIG. 9-40 (1), a symbol display (for example, a right-facing triangle display) indicating the right-handed display is displayed on the image display device 5. Thus, the right-handed notification may be executed.

  Further, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right hit notification is given during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-40 (2)), and the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. In the case where a small hit occurs in, the right hit notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-40 (3)), but when the small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol Alternatively, the right-handed notification may not be performed in some cases. For example, when a small hit occurs when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a situation where the left hit operation should be performed in the normal state, the right hit notification is not performed during the small hit game. You may.

  In addition, according to this feature section 080IW, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. Is. Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, it is possible to control to a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state). Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, it is possible to control to a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable variation state) and a specific state (for example, a probable variation state) that is easier to control to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. Further, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for a small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display. Further, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different numbers of specific determination values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”). Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common when controlled to the non-specific state and controlled to the specific state (FIGS. 9-1 and 9). -2). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

  Specifically, if the lottery probability other than the jackpot winning probability and the type distribution change depending on the setting value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in payout performance) becomes too remarkable depending on the setting value, and the gambling probability may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in the characteristic part 080IW, the number of special determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the small hit winning probability is made common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is prevented from becoming excessively large depending on the set value. However, it prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

  Further, according to the feature section 080IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). And can be executed in parallel). Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, the KT state) in which the frequency of the variable display of the second identification information becomes a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol). Therefore, in the gaming machine that can be controlled in the special state, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

  Further, according to the present characteristic unit 080IW, as the special state, there are a first special state (for example, the first KT state) and a second special state (for example, the second KT state) having a higher advantage than the first special state. It is controllable. Therefore, in the gaming machine that can be controlled to the second special state, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

  Further, according to the characteristic part 080IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, a normal big hit, a first probability variation big hit, a second probability variation big hit, and a third probability variation big hit). Further, the type of the advantageous state is determined using the advantageous type determination value (for example, the jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of the advantageous state. The number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-3). Therefore, more appropriate game play can be realized.

  Specifically, in the feature unit 080IW, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the big hit type is commonly assigned), so that the difference in the advantageous degree is excessively large depending on the set value. It prevents the gambling from becoming excessively high.

  Note that, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9C, the case where the jackpot type allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6” is shown. It is not limited to the mode. For example, the determination ratio of the big hit type may be changed depending on which of the set values “1” to “6”, and the advantage may be varied depending on the set value.

  In addition, according to this feature section 080IW, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. Is. Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, it is possible to control to a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state). Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). The judgment value includes a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. It is determined that the special judgment value (for example, the judgment value for the small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display the predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a predetermined determination value (for example, a determination value for determination of deviation) are included. Further, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different numbers of specific determination values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”). The number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values, and the number of the predetermined determination values differs depending on the set value (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of guessing the set value and improve the interest in the game.

  Further, according to the characteristic unit 080IW, it is possible to control to a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable variation state) and a specific state (for example, a probable variation state) that is easier to control than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to the specific states of all the set values (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value during the specific state.

  Further, according to the feature section 080IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). Variable display can be performed in parallel). Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is larger than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state is performed. The corresponding judgment value includes a predetermined judgment value (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

  Further, according to the characteristic unit 080IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit game state). Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, it is possible to control to a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state). Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for a small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display. Further, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different numbers of specific determination values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”). Further, the number of special determination values among the determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-2), and the determination corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is performed. The number of special determination values differs between the value and the determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the game while realizing the appropriate game playability.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special pattern display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
10 General prize hole 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Voice control board 14 LED control board 15 Relay board 17 Special variable winning ball device 20 Normal pattern display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start Mouth switch 23 ... First count switch 24 ... Second count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 41 ... Passage gate 100 ... Game control microcomputers 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
A game state control means capable of controlling a plurality of game states,
A special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize a predetermined display when the game state is switched,
The special effect executing means,
As the special effect, after executing a pseudo-closed effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the predetermined display by displaying a specific image, an open effect that separates the specific image and makes the predetermined display visible is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images